1 /* SPDX-License-Identifier: GPL-2.0-only */
2 /*
3 * mac80211 <-> driver interface
4 *
5 * Copyright 2002-2005, Devicescape Software, Inc.
6 * Copyright 2006-2007 Jiri Benc <jbenc@suse.cz>
7 * Copyright 2007-2010 Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net>
8 * Copyright 2013-2014 Intel Mobile Communications GmbH
9 * Copyright (C) 2015 - 2017 Intel Deutschland GmbH
10 * Copyright (C) 2018 - 2022 Intel Corporation
11 */
12
13 #ifndef MAC80211_H
14 #define MAC80211_H
15
16 #include <linux/bug.h>
17 #include <linux/kernel.h>
18 #include <linux/if_ether.h>
19 #include <linux/skbuff.h>
20 #include <linux/ieee80211.h>
21 #include <linux/lockdep.h>
22 #include <linux/android_kabi.h>
23 #include <net/cfg80211.h>
24 #include <net/codel.h>
25 #include <net/ieee80211_radiotap.h>
26 #include <asm/unaligned.h>
27
28 /**
29 * DOC: Introduction
30 *
31 * mac80211 is the Linux stack for 802.11 hardware that implements
32 * only partial functionality in hard- or firmware. This document
33 * defines the interface between mac80211 and low-level hardware
34 * drivers.
35 */
36
37 /**
38 * DOC: Calling mac80211 from interrupts
39 *
40 * Only ieee80211_tx_status_irqsafe() and ieee80211_rx_irqsafe() can be
41 * called in hardware interrupt context. The low-level driver must not call any
42 * other functions in hardware interrupt context. If there is a need for such
43 * call, the low-level driver should first ACK the interrupt and perform the
44 * IEEE 802.11 code call after this, e.g. from a scheduled workqueue or even
45 * tasklet function.
46 *
47 * NOTE: If the driver opts to use the _irqsafe() functions, it may not also
48 * use the non-IRQ-safe functions!
49 */
50
51 /**
52 * DOC: Warning
53 *
54 * If you're reading this document and not the header file itself, it will
55 * be incomplete because not all documentation has been converted yet.
56 */
57
58 /**
59 * DOC: Frame format
60 *
61 * As a general rule, when frames are passed between mac80211 and the driver,
62 * they start with the IEEE 802.11 header and include the same octets that are
63 * sent over the air except for the FCS which should be calculated by the
64 * hardware.
65 *
66 * There are, however, various exceptions to this rule for advanced features:
67 *
68 * The first exception is for hardware encryption and decryption offload
69 * where the IV/ICV may or may not be generated in hardware.
70 *
71 * Secondly, when the hardware handles fragmentation, the frame handed to
72 * the driver from mac80211 is the MSDU, not the MPDU.
73 */
74
75 /**
76 * DOC: mac80211 workqueue
77 *
78 * mac80211 provides its own workqueue for drivers and internal mac80211 use.
79 * The workqueue is a single threaded workqueue and can only be accessed by
80 * helpers for sanity checking. Drivers must ensure all work added onto the
81 * mac80211 workqueue should be cancelled on the driver stop() callback.
82 *
83 * mac80211 will flushed the workqueue upon interface removal and during
84 * suspend.
85 *
86 * All work performed on the mac80211 workqueue must not acquire the RTNL lock.
87 *
88 */
89
90 /**
91 * DOC: mac80211 software tx queueing
92 *
93 * mac80211 provides an optional intermediate queueing implementation designed
94 * to allow the driver to keep hardware queues short and provide some fairness
95 * between different stations/interfaces.
96 * In this model, the driver pulls data frames from the mac80211 queue instead
97 * of letting mac80211 push them via drv_tx().
98 * Other frames (e.g. control or management) are still pushed using drv_tx().
99 *
100 * Drivers indicate that they use this model by implementing the .wake_tx_queue
101 * driver operation.
102 *
103 * Intermediate queues (struct ieee80211_txq) are kept per-sta per-tid, with
104 * another per-sta for non-data/non-mgmt and bufferable management frames, and
105 * a single per-vif queue for multicast data frames.
106 *
107 * The driver is expected to initialize its private per-queue data for stations
108 * and interfaces in the .add_interface and .sta_add ops.
109 *
110 * The driver can't access the queue directly. To dequeue a frame from a
111 * txq, it calls ieee80211_tx_dequeue(). Whenever mac80211 adds a new frame to a
112 * queue, it calls the .wake_tx_queue driver op.
113 *
114 * Drivers can optionally delegate responsibility for scheduling queues to
115 * mac80211, to take advantage of airtime fairness accounting. In this case, to
116 * obtain the next queue to pull frames from, the driver calls
117 * ieee80211_next_txq(). The driver is then expected to return the txq using
118 * ieee80211_return_txq().
119 *
120 * For AP powersave TIM handling, the driver only needs to indicate if it has
121 * buffered packets in the driver specific data structures by calling
122 * ieee80211_sta_set_buffered(). For frames buffered in the ieee80211_txq
123 * struct, mac80211 sets the appropriate TIM PVB bits and calls
124 * .release_buffered_frames().
125 * In that callback the driver is therefore expected to release its own
126 * buffered frames and afterwards also frames from the ieee80211_txq (obtained
127 * via the usual ieee80211_tx_dequeue).
128 */
129
130 /**
131 * DOC: HW timestamping
132 *
133 * Timing Measurement and Fine Timing Measurement require accurate timestamps
134 * of the action frames TX/RX and their respective acks.
135 *
136 * To report hardware timestamps for Timing Measurement or Fine Timing
137 * Measurement frame RX, the low level driver should set the SKB's hwtstamp
138 * field to the frame RX timestamp and report the ack TX timestamp in the
139 * ieee80211_rx_status struct.
140 *
141 * Similarly, To report hardware timestamps for Timing Measurement or Fine
142 * Timing Measurement frame TX, the driver should set the SKB's hwtstamp field
143 * to the frame TX timestamp and report the ack RX timestamp in the
144 * ieee80211_tx_status struct.
145 */
146 struct device;
147
148 /**
149 * enum ieee80211_max_queues - maximum number of queues
150 *
151 * @IEEE80211_MAX_QUEUES: Maximum number of regular device queues.
152 * @IEEE80211_MAX_QUEUE_MAP: bitmap with maximum queues set
153 */
154 enum ieee80211_max_queues {
155 IEEE80211_MAX_QUEUES = 16,
156 IEEE80211_MAX_QUEUE_MAP = BIT(IEEE80211_MAX_QUEUES) - 1,
157 };
158
159 #define IEEE80211_INVAL_HW_QUEUE 0xff
160
161 /**
162 * enum ieee80211_ac_numbers - AC numbers as used in mac80211
163 * @IEEE80211_AC_VO: voice
164 * @IEEE80211_AC_VI: video
165 * @IEEE80211_AC_BE: best effort
166 * @IEEE80211_AC_BK: background
167 */
168 enum ieee80211_ac_numbers {
169 IEEE80211_AC_VO = 0,
170 IEEE80211_AC_VI = 1,
171 IEEE80211_AC_BE = 2,
172 IEEE80211_AC_BK = 3,
173 };
174
175 /**
176 * struct ieee80211_tx_queue_params - transmit queue configuration
177 *
178 * The information provided in this structure is required for QoS
179 * transmit queue configuration. Cf. IEEE 802.11 7.3.2.29.
180 *
181 * @aifs: arbitration interframe space [0..255]
182 * @cw_min: minimum contention window [a value of the form
183 * 2^n-1 in the range 1..32767]
184 * @cw_max: maximum contention window [like @cw_min]
185 * @txop: maximum burst time in units of 32 usecs, 0 meaning disabled
186 * @acm: is mandatory admission control required for the access category
187 * @uapsd: is U-APSD mode enabled for the queue
188 * @mu_edca: is the MU EDCA configured
189 * @mu_edca_param_rec: MU EDCA Parameter Record for HE
190 */
191 struct ieee80211_tx_queue_params {
192 u16 txop;
193 u16 cw_min;
194 u16 cw_max;
195 u8 aifs;
196 bool acm;
197 bool uapsd;
198 bool mu_edca;
199 struct ieee80211_he_mu_edca_param_ac_rec mu_edca_param_rec;
200 };
201
202 struct ieee80211_low_level_stats {
203 unsigned int dot11ACKFailureCount;
204 unsigned int dot11RTSFailureCount;
205 unsigned int dot11FCSErrorCount;
206 unsigned int dot11RTSSuccessCount;
207 };
208
209 /**
210 * enum ieee80211_chanctx_change - change flag for channel context
211 * @IEEE80211_CHANCTX_CHANGE_WIDTH: The channel width changed
212 * @IEEE80211_CHANCTX_CHANGE_RX_CHAINS: The number of RX chains changed
213 * @IEEE80211_CHANCTX_CHANGE_RADAR: radar detection flag changed
214 * @IEEE80211_CHANCTX_CHANGE_CHANNEL: switched to another operating channel,
215 * this is used only with channel switching with CSA
216 * @IEEE80211_CHANCTX_CHANGE_MIN_WIDTH: The min required channel width changed
217 */
218 enum ieee80211_chanctx_change {
219 IEEE80211_CHANCTX_CHANGE_WIDTH = BIT(0),
220 IEEE80211_CHANCTX_CHANGE_RX_CHAINS = BIT(1),
221 IEEE80211_CHANCTX_CHANGE_RADAR = BIT(2),
222 IEEE80211_CHANCTX_CHANGE_CHANNEL = BIT(3),
223 IEEE80211_CHANCTX_CHANGE_MIN_WIDTH = BIT(4),
224 };
225
226 /**
227 * struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf - channel context that vifs may be tuned to
228 *
229 * This is the driver-visible part. The ieee80211_chanctx
230 * that contains it is visible in mac80211 only.
231 *
232 * @def: the channel definition
233 * @min_def: the minimum channel definition currently required.
234 * @rx_chains_static: The number of RX chains that must always be
235 * active on the channel to receive MIMO transmissions
236 * @rx_chains_dynamic: The number of RX chains that must be enabled
237 * after RTS/CTS handshake to receive SMPS MIMO transmissions;
238 * this will always be >= @rx_chains_static.
239 * @radar_enabled: whether radar detection is enabled on this channel.
240 * @drv_priv: data area for driver use, will always be aligned to
241 * sizeof(void *), size is determined in hw information.
242 */
243 struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf {
244 struct cfg80211_chan_def def;
245 struct cfg80211_chan_def min_def;
246
247 u8 rx_chains_static, rx_chains_dynamic;
248
249 bool radar_enabled;
250
251 u8 drv_priv[] __aligned(sizeof(void *));
252 };
253
254 /**
255 * enum ieee80211_chanctx_switch_mode - channel context switch mode
256 * @CHANCTX_SWMODE_REASSIGN_VIF: Both old and new contexts already
257 * exist (and will continue to exist), but the virtual interface
258 * needs to be switched from one to the other.
259 * @CHANCTX_SWMODE_SWAP_CONTEXTS: The old context exists but will stop
260 * to exist with this call, the new context doesn't exist but
261 * will be active after this call, the virtual interface switches
262 * from the old to the new (note that the driver may of course
263 * implement this as an on-the-fly chandef switch of the existing
264 * hardware context, but the mac80211 pointer for the old context
265 * will cease to exist and only the new one will later be used
266 * for changes/removal.)
267 */
268 enum ieee80211_chanctx_switch_mode {
269 CHANCTX_SWMODE_REASSIGN_VIF,
270 CHANCTX_SWMODE_SWAP_CONTEXTS,
271 };
272
273 /**
274 * struct ieee80211_vif_chanctx_switch - vif chanctx switch information
275 *
276 * This is structure is used to pass information about a vif that
277 * needs to switch from one chanctx to another. The
278 * &ieee80211_chanctx_switch_mode defines how the switch should be
279 * done.
280 *
281 * @vif: the vif that should be switched from old_ctx to new_ctx
282 * @link_conf: the link conf that's switching
283 * @old_ctx: the old context to which the vif was assigned
284 * @new_ctx: the new context to which the vif must be assigned
285 */
286 struct ieee80211_vif_chanctx_switch {
287 struct ieee80211_vif *vif;
288 struct ieee80211_bss_conf *link_conf;
289 struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf *old_ctx;
290 struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf *new_ctx;
291 };
292
293 /**
294 * enum ieee80211_bss_change - BSS change notification flags
295 *
296 * These flags are used with the bss_info_changed(), link_info_changed()
297 * and vif_cfg_changed() callbacks to indicate which parameter(s) changed.
298 *
299 * @BSS_CHANGED_ASSOC: association status changed (associated/disassociated),
300 * also implies a change in the AID.
301 * @BSS_CHANGED_ERP_CTS_PROT: CTS protection changed
302 * @BSS_CHANGED_ERP_PREAMBLE: preamble changed
303 * @BSS_CHANGED_ERP_SLOT: slot timing changed
304 * @BSS_CHANGED_HT: 802.11n parameters changed
305 * @BSS_CHANGED_BASIC_RATES: Basic rateset changed
306 * @BSS_CHANGED_BEACON_INT: Beacon interval changed
307 * @BSS_CHANGED_BSSID: BSSID changed, for whatever
308 * reason (IBSS and managed mode)
309 * @BSS_CHANGED_BEACON: Beacon data changed, retrieve
310 * new beacon (beaconing modes)
311 * @BSS_CHANGED_BEACON_ENABLED: Beaconing should be
312 * enabled/disabled (beaconing modes)
313 * @BSS_CHANGED_CQM: Connection quality monitor config changed
314 * @BSS_CHANGED_IBSS: IBSS join status changed
315 * @BSS_CHANGED_ARP_FILTER: Hardware ARP filter address list or state changed.
316 * @BSS_CHANGED_QOS: QoS for this association was enabled/disabled. Note
317 * that it is only ever disabled for station mode.
318 * @BSS_CHANGED_IDLE: Idle changed for this BSS/interface.
319 * @BSS_CHANGED_SSID: SSID changed for this BSS (AP and IBSS mode)
320 * @BSS_CHANGED_AP_PROBE_RESP: Probe Response changed for this BSS (AP mode)
321 * @BSS_CHANGED_PS: PS changed for this BSS (STA mode)
322 * @BSS_CHANGED_TXPOWER: TX power setting changed for this interface
323 * @BSS_CHANGED_P2P_PS: P2P powersave settings (CTWindow, opportunistic PS)
324 * changed
325 * @BSS_CHANGED_BEACON_INFO: Data from the AP's beacon became available:
326 * currently dtim_period only is under consideration.
327 * @BSS_CHANGED_BANDWIDTH: The bandwidth used by this interface changed,
328 * note that this is only called when it changes after the channel
329 * context had been assigned.
330 * @BSS_CHANGED_OCB: OCB join status changed
331 * @BSS_CHANGED_MU_GROUPS: VHT MU-MIMO group id or user position changed
332 * @BSS_CHANGED_KEEP_ALIVE: keep alive options (idle period or protected
333 * keep alive) changed.
334 * @BSS_CHANGED_MCAST_RATE: Multicast Rate setting changed for this interface
335 * @BSS_CHANGED_FTM_RESPONDER: fine timing measurement request responder
336 * functionality changed for this BSS (AP mode).
337 * @BSS_CHANGED_TWT: TWT status changed
338 * @BSS_CHANGED_HE_OBSS_PD: OBSS Packet Detection status changed.
339 * @BSS_CHANGED_HE_BSS_COLOR: BSS Color has changed
340 * @BSS_CHANGED_FILS_DISCOVERY: FILS discovery status changed.
341 * @BSS_CHANGED_UNSOL_BCAST_PROBE_RESP: Unsolicited broadcast probe response
342 * status changed.
343 *
344 */
345 enum ieee80211_bss_change {
346 BSS_CHANGED_ASSOC = 1<<0,
347 BSS_CHANGED_ERP_CTS_PROT = 1<<1,
348 BSS_CHANGED_ERP_PREAMBLE = 1<<2,
349 BSS_CHANGED_ERP_SLOT = 1<<3,
350 BSS_CHANGED_HT = 1<<4,
351 BSS_CHANGED_BASIC_RATES = 1<<5,
352 BSS_CHANGED_BEACON_INT = 1<<6,
353 BSS_CHANGED_BSSID = 1<<7,
354 BSS_CHANGED_BEACON = 1<<8,
355 BSS_CHANGED_BEACON_ENABLED = 1<<9,
356 BSS_CHANGED_CQM = 1<<10,
357 BSS_CHANGED_IBSS = 1<<11,
358 BSS_CHANGED_ARP_FILTER = 1<<12,
359 BSS_CHANGED_QOS = 1<<13,
360 BSS_CHANGED_IDLE = 1<<14,
361 BSS_CHANGED_SSID = 1<<15,
362 BSS_CHANGED_AP_PROBE_RESP = 1<<16,
363 BSS_CHANGED_PS = 1<<17,
364 BSS_CHANGED_TXPOWER = 1<<18,
365 BSS_CHANGED_P2P_PS = 1<<19,
366 BSS_CHANGED_BEACON_INFO = 1<<20,
367 BSS_CHANGED_BANDWIDTH = 1<<21,
368 BSS_CHANGED_OCB = 1<<22,
369 BSS_CHANGED_MU_GROUPS = 1<<23,
370 BSS_CHANGED_KEEP_ALIVE = 1<<24,
371 BSS_CHANGED_MCAST_RATE = 1<<25,
372 BSS_CHANGED_FTM_RESPONDER = 1<<26,
373 BSS_CHANGED_TWT = 1<<27,
374 BSS_CHANGED_HE_OBSS_PD = 1<<28,
375 BSS_CHANGED_HE_BSS_COLOR = 1<<29,
376 BSS_CHANGED_FILS_DISCOVERY = 1<<30,
377 BSS_CHANGED_UNSOL_BCAST_PROBE_RESP = 1<<31,
378
379 /* when adding here, make sure to change ieee80211_reconfig */
380 };
381
382 /*
383 * The maximum number of IPv4 addresses listed for ARP filtering. If the number
384 * of addresses for an interface increase beyond this value, hardware ARP
385 * filtering will be disabled.
386 */
387 #define IEEE80211_BSS_ARP_ADDR_LIST_LEN 4
388
389 /**
390 * enum ieee80211_event_type - event to be notified to the low level driver
391 * @RSSI_EVENT: AP's rssi crossed the a threshold set by the driver.
392 * @MLME_EVENT: event related to MLME
393 * @BAR_RX_EVENT: a BAR was received
394 * @BA_FRAME_TIMEOUT: Frames were released from the reordering buffer because
395 * they timed out. This won't be called for each frame released, but only
396 * once each time the timeout triggers.
397 */
398 enum ieee80211_event_type {
399 RSSI_EVENT,
400 MLME_EVENT,
401 BAR_RX_EVENT,
402 BA_FRAME_TIMEOUT,
403 };
404
405 /**
406 * enum ieee80211_rssi_event_data - relevant when event type is %RSSI_EVENT
407 * @RSSI_EVENT_HIGH: AP's rssi went below the threshold set by the driver.
408 * @RSSI_EVENT_LOW: AP's rssi went above the threshold set by the driver.
409 */
410 enum ieee80211_rssi_event_data {
411 RSSI_EVENT_HIGH,
412 RSSI_EVENT_LOW,
413 };
414
415 /**
416 * struct ieee80211_rssi_event - data attached to an %RSSI_EVENT
417 * @data: See &enum ieee80211_rssi_event_data
418 */
419 struct ieee80211_rssi_event {
420 enum ieee80211_rssi_event_data data;
421 };
422
423 /**
424 * enum ieee80211_mlme_event_data - relevant when event type is %MLME_EVENT
425 * @AUTH_EVENT: the MLME operation is authentication
426 * @ASSOC_EVENT: the MLME operation is association
427 * @DEAUTH_RX_EVENT: deauth received..
428 * @DEAUTH_TX_EVENT: deauth sent.
429 */
430 enum ieee80211_mlme_event_data {
431 AUTH_EVENT,
432 ASSOC_EVENT,
433 DEAUTH_RX_EVENT,
434 DEAUTH_TX_EVENT,
435 };
436
437 /**
438 * enum ieee80211_mlme_event_status - relevant when event type is %MLME_EVENT
439 * @MLME_SUCCESS: the MLME operation completed successfully.
440 * @MLME_DENIED: the MLME operation was denied by the peer.
441 * @MLME_TIMEOUT: the MLME operation timed out.
442 */
443 enum ieee80211_mlme_event_status {
444 MLME_SUCCESS,
445 MLME_DENIED,
446 MLME_TIMEOUT,
447 };
448
449 /**
450 * struct ieee80211_mlme_event - data attached to an %MLME_EVENT
451 * @data: See &enum ieee80211_mlme_event_data
452 * @status: See &enum ieee80211_mlme_event_status
453 * @reason: the reason code if applicable
454 */
455 struct ieee80211_mlme_event {
456 enum ieee80211_mlme_event_data data;
457 enum ieee80211_mlme_event_status status;
458 u16 reason;
459 };
460
461 /**
462 * struct ieee80211_ba_event - data attached for BlockAck related events
463 * @sta: pointer to the &ieee80211_sta to which this event relates
464 * @tid: the tid
465 * @ssn: the starting sequence number (for %BAR_RX_EVENT)
466 */
467 struct ieee80211_ba_event {
468 struct ieee80211_sta *sta;
469 u16 tid;
470 u16 ssn;
471 };
472
473 /**
474 * struct ieee80211_event - event to be sent to the driver
475 * @type: The event itself. See &enum ieee80211_event_type.
476 * @rssi: relevant if &type is %RSSI_EVENT
477 * @mlme: relevant if &type is %AUTH_EVENT
478 * @ba: relevant if &type is %BAR_RX_EVENT or %BA_FRAME_TIMEOUT
479 * @u:union holding the fields above
480 */
481 struct ieee80211_event {
482 enum ieee80211_event_type type;
483 union {
484 struct ieee80211_rssi_event rssi;
485 struct ieee80211_mlme_event mlme;
486 struct ieee80211_ba_event ba;
487 } u;
488 };
489
490 /**
491 * struct ieee80211_mu_group_data - STA's VHT MU-MIMO group data
492 *
493 * This structure describes the group id data of VHT MU-MIMO
494 *
495 * @membership: 64 bits array - a bit is set if station is member of the group
496 * @position: 2 bits per group id indicating the position in the group
497 */
498 struct ieee80211_mu_group_data {
499 u8 membership[WLAN_MEMBERSHIP_LEN];
500 u8 position[WLAN_USER_POSITION_LEN];
501 };
502
503 /**
504 * struct ieee80211_ftm_responder_params - FTM responder parameters
505 *
506 * @lci: LCI subelement content
507 * @civicloc: CIVIC location subelement content
508 * @lci_len: LCI data length
509 * @civicloc_len: Civic data length
510 */
511 struct ieee80211_ftm_responder_params {
512 const u8 *lci;
513 const u8 *civicloc;
514 size_t lci_len;
515 size_t civicloc_len;
516 };
517
518 /**
519 * struct ieee80211_fils_discovery - FILS discovery parameters from
520 * IEEE Std 802.11ai-2016, Annex C.3 MIB detail.
521 *
522 * @min_interval: Minimum packet interval in TUs (0 - 10000)
523 * @max_interval: Maximum packet interval in TUs (0 - 10000)
524 */
525 struct ieee80211_fils_discovery {
526 u32 min_interval;
527 u32 max_interval;
528 };
529
530 /**
531 * struct ieee80211_bss_conf - holds the BSS's changing parameters
532 *
533 * This structure keeps information about a BSS (and an association
534 * to that BSS) that can change during the lifetime of the BSS.
535 *
536 * @addr: (link) address used locally
537 * @link_id: link ID, or 0 for non-MLO
538 * @htc_trig_based_pkt_ext: default PE in 4us units, if BSS supports HE
539 * @uora_exists: is the UORA element advertised by AP
540 * @ack_enabled: indicates support to receive a multi-TID that solicits either
541 * ACK, BACK or both
542 * @uora_ocw_range: UORA element's OCW Range field
543 * @frame_time_rts_th: HE duration RTS threshold, in units of 32us
544 * @he_support: does this BSS support HE
545 * @twt_requester: does this BSS support TWT requester (relevant for managed
546 * mode only, set if the AP advertises TWT responder role)
547 * @twt_responder: does this BSS support TWT requester (relevant for managed
548 * mode only, set if the AP advertises TWT responder role)
549 * @twt_protected: does this BSS support protected TWT frames
550 * @twt_broadcast: does this BSS support broadcast TWT
551 * @use_cts_prot: use CTS protection
552 * @use_short_preamble: use 802.11b short preamble
553 * @use_short_slot: use short slot time (only relevant for ERP)
554 * @dtim_period: num of beacons before the next DTIM, for beaconing,
555 * valid in station mode only if after the driver was notified
556 * with the %BSS_CHANGED_BEACON_INFO flag, will be non-zero then.
557 * @sync_tsf: last beacon's/probe response's TSF timestamp (could be old
558 * as it may have been received during scanning long ago). If the
559 * HW flag %IEEE80211_HW_TIMING_BEACON_ONLY is set, then this can
560 * only come from a beacon, but might not become valid until after
561 * association when a beacon is received (which is notified with the
562 * %BSS_CHANGED_DTIM flag.). See also sync_dtim_count important notice.
563 * @sync_device_ts: the device timestamp corresponding to the sync_tsf,
564 * the driver/device can use this to calculate synchronisation
565 * (see @sync_tsf). See also sync_dtim_count important notice.
566 * @sync_dtim_count: Only valid when %IEEE80211_HW_TIMING_BEACON_ONLY
567 * is requested, see @sync_tsf/@sync_device_ts.
568 * IMPORTANT: These three sync_* parameters would possibly be out of sync
569 * by the time the driver will use them. The synchronized view is currently
570 * guaranteed only in certain callbacks.
571 * Note also that this is not used with MLD associations, mac80211 doesn't
572 * know how to track beacons for all of the links for this.
573 * @beacon_int: beacon interval
574 * @assoc_capability: capabilities taken from assoc resp
575 * @basic_rates: bitmap of basic rates, each bit stands for an
576 * index into the rate table configured by the driver in
577 * the current band.
578 * @beacon_rate: associated AP's beacon TX rate
579 * @mcast_rate: per-band multicast rate index + 1 (0: disabled)
580 * @bssid: The BSSID for this BSS
581 * @enable_beacon: whether beaconing should be enabled or not
582 * @chandef: Channel definition for this BSS -- the hardware might be
583 * configured a higher bandwidth than this BSS uses, for example.
584 * @mu_group: VHT MU-MIMO group membership data
585 * @ht_operation_mode: HT operation mode like in &struct ieee80211_ht_operation.
586 * This field is only valid when the channel is a wide HT/VHT channel.
587 * Note that with TDLS this can be the case (channel is HT, protection must
588 * be used from this field) even when the BSS association isn't using HT.
589 * @cqm_rssi_thold: Connection quality monitor RSSI threshold, a zero value
590 * implies disabled. As with the cfg80211 callback, a change here should
591 * cause an event to be sent indicating where the current value is in
592 * relation to the newly configured threshold.
593 * @cqm_rssi_low: Connection quality monitor RSSI lower threshold, a zero value
594 * implies disabled. This is an alternative mechanism to the single
595 * threshold event and can't be enabled simultaneously with it.
596 * @cqm_rssi_high: Connection quality monitor RSSI upper threshold.
597 * @cqm_rssi_hyst: Connection quality monitor RSSI hysteresis
598 * @qos: This is a QoS-enabled BSS.
599 * @hidden_ssid: The SSID of the current vif is hidden. Only valid in AP-mode.
600 * @txpower: TX power in dBm. INT_MIN means not configured.
601 * @txpower_type: TX power adjustment used to control per packet Transmit
602 * Power Control (TPC) in lower driver for the current vif. In particular
603 * TPC is enabled if value passed in %txpower_type is
604 * NL80211_TX_POWER_LIMITED (allow using less than specified from
605 * userspace), whereas TPC is disabled if %txpower_type is set to
606 * NL80211_TX_POWER_FIXED (use value configured from userspace)
607 * @p2p_noa_attr: P2P NoA attribute for P2P powersave
608 * @allow_p2p_go_ps: indication for AP or P2P GO interface, whether it's allowed
609 * to use P2P PS mechanism or not. AP/P2P GO is not allowed to use P2P PS
610 * if it has associated clients without P2P PS support.
611 * @max_idle_period: the time period during which the station can refrain from
612 * transmitting frames to its associated AP without being disassociated.
613 * In units of 1000 TUs. Zero value indicates that the AP did not include
614 * a (valid) BSS Max Idle Period Element.
615 * @protected_keep_alive: if set, indicates that the station should send an RSN
616 * protected frame to the AP to reset the idle timer at the AP for the
617 * station.
618 * @ftm_responder: whether to enable or disable fine timing measurement FTM
619 * responder functionality.
620 * @ftmr_params: configurable lci/civic parameter when enabling FTM responder.
621 * @nontransmitted: this BSS is a nontransmitted BSS profile
622 * @transmitter_bssid: the address of transmitter AP
623 * @bssid_index: index inside the multiple BSSID set
624 * @bssid_indicator: 2^bssid_indicator is the maximum number of APs in set
625 * @ema_ap: AP supports enhancements of discovery and advertisement of
626 * nontransmitted BSSIDs
627 * @profile_periodicity: the least number of beacon frames need to be received
628 * in order to discover all the nontransmitted BSSIDs in the set.
629 * @he_oper: HE operation information of the BSS (AP/Mesh) or of the AP we are
630 * connected to (STA)
631 * @he_obss_pd: OBSS Packet Detection parameters.
632 * @he_bss_color: BSS coloring settings, if BSS supports HE
633 * @fils_discovery: FILS discovery configuration
634 * @unsol_bcast_probe_resp_interval: Unsolicited broadcast probe response
635 * interval.
636 * @beacon_tx_rate: The configured beacon transmit rate that needs to be passed
637 * to driver when rate control is offloaded to firmware.
638 * @power_type: power type of BSS for 6 GHz
639 * @tx_pwr_env: transmit power envelope array of BSS.
640 * @tx_pwr_env_num: number of @tx_pwr_env.
641 * @pwr_reduction: power constraint of BSS.
642 * @eht_support: does this BSS support EHT
643 * @csa_active: marks whether a channel switch is going on. Internally it is
644 * write-protected by sdata_lock and local->mtx so holding either is fine
645 * for read access.
646 * @mu_mimo_owner: indicates interface owns MU-MIMO capability
647 * @chanctx_conf: The channel context this interface is assigned to, or %NULL
648 * when it is not assigned. This pointer is RCU-protected due to the TX
649 * path needing to access it; even though the netdev carrier will always
650 * be off when it is %NULL there can still be races and packets could be
651 * processed after it switches back to %NULL.
652 * @color_change_active: marks whether a color change is ongoing. Internally it is
653 * write-protected by sdata_lock and local->mtx so holding either is fine
654 * for read access.
655 * @color_change_color: the bss color that will be used after the change.
656 */
657 struct ieee80211_bss_conf {
658 const u8 *bssid;
659 unsigned int link_id;
660 u8 addr[ETH_ALEN] __aligned(2);
661 u8 htc_trig_based_pkt_ext;
662 bool uora_exists;
663 u8 uora_ocw_range;
664 u16 frame_time_rts_th;
665 bool he_support;
666 bool twt_requester;
667 bool twt_responder;
668 bool twt_protected;
669 bool twt_broadcast;
670 /* erp related data */
671 bool use_cts_prot;
672 bool use_short_preamble;
673 bool use_short_slot;
674 bool enable_beacon;
675 u8 dtim_period;
676 u16 beacon_int;
677 u16 assoc_capability;
678 u64 sync_tsf;
679 u32 sync_device_ts;
680 u8 sync_dtim_count;
681 u32 basic_rates;
682 struct ieee80211_rate *beacon_rate;
683 int mcast_rate[NUM_NL80211_BANDS];
684 u16 ht_operation_mode;
685 s32 cqm_rssi_thold;
686 u32 cqm_rssi_hyst;
687 s32 cqm_rssi_low;
688 s32 cqm_rssi_high;
689 struct cfg80211_chan_def chandef;
690 struct ieee80211_mu_group_data mu_group;
691 bool qos;
692 bool hidden_ssid;
693 int txpower;
694 enum nl80211_tx_power_setting txpower_type;
695 struct ieee80211_p2p_noa_attr p2p_noa_attr;
696 bool allow_p2p_go_ps;
697 u16 max_idle_period;
698 bool protected_keep_alive;
699 bool ftm_responder;
700 struct ieee80211_ftm_responder_params *ftmr_params;
701 /* Multiple BSSID data */
702 bool nontransmitted;
703 u8 transmitter_bssid[ETH_ALEN];
704 u8 bssid_index;
705 u8 bssid_indicator;
706 bool ema_ap;
707 u8 profile_periodicity;
708 struct {
709 u32 params;
710 u16 nss_set;
711 } he_oper;
712 struct ieee80211_he_obss_pd he_obss_pd;
713 struct cfg80211_he_bss_color he_bss_color;
714 struct ieee80211_fils_discovery fils_discovery;
715 u32 unsol_bcast_probe_resp_interval;
716 struct cfg80211_bitrate_mask beacon_tx_rate;
717 enum ieee80211_ap_reg_power power_type;
718 struct ieee80211_tx_pwr_env tx_pwr_env[IEEE80211_TPE_MAX_IE_COUNT];
719 u8 tx_pwr_env_num;
720 u8 pwr_reduction;
721 bool eht_support;
722
723 bool csa_active;
724 bool mu_mimo_owner;
725 struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf __rcu *chanctx_conf;
726
727 bool color_change_active;
728 u8 color_change_color;
729
730 ANDROID_KABI_RESERVE(1);
731 };
732
733 /**
734 * enum mac80211_tx_info_flags - flags to describe transmission information/status
735 *
736 * These flags are used with the @flags member of &ieee80211_tx_info.
737 *
738 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_REQ_TX_STATUS: require TX status callback for this frame.
739 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_ASSIGN_SEQ: The driver has to assign a sequence
740 * number to this frame, taking care of not overwriting the fragment
741 * number and increasing the sequence number only when the
742 * IEEE80211_TX_CTL_FIRST_FRAGMENT flag is set. mac80211 will properly
743 * assign sequence numbers to QoS-data frames but cannot do so correctly
744 * for non-QoS-data and management frames because beacons need them from
745 * that counter as well and mac80211 cannot guarantee proper sequencing.
746 * If this flag is set, the driver should instruct the hardware to
747 * assign a sequence number to the frame or assign one itself. Cf. IEEE
748 * 802.11-2007 7.1.3.4.1 paragraph 3. This flag will always be set for
749 * beacons and always be clear for frames without a sequence number field.
750 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_ACK: tell the low level not to wait for an ack
751 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_CLEAR_PS_FILT: clear powersave filter for destination
752 * station
753 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_FIRST_FRAGMENT: this is a first fragment of the frame
754 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_SEND_AFTER_DTIM: send this frame after DTIM beacon
755 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_AMPDU: this frame should be sent as part of an A-MPDU
756 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_INJECTED: Frame was injected, internal to mac80211.
757 * @IEEE80211_TX_STAT_TX_FILTERED: The frame was not transmitted
758 * because the destination STA was in powersave mode. Note that to
759 * avoid race conditions, the filter must be set by the hardware or
760 * firmware upon receiving a frame that indicates that the station
761 * went to sleep (must be done on device to filter frames already on
762 * the queue) and may only be unset after mac80211 gives the OK for
763 * that by setting the IEEE80211_TX_CTL_CLEAR_PS_FILT (see above),
764 * since only then is it guaranteed that no more frames are in the
765 * hardware queue.
766 * @IEEE80211_TX_STAT_ACK: Frame was acknowledged
767 * @IEEE80211_TX_STAT_AMPDU: The frame was aggregated, so status
768 * is for the whole aggregation.
769 * @IEEE80211_TX_STAT_AMPDU_NO_BACK: no block ack was returned,
770 * so consider using block ack request (BAR).
771 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_RATE_CTRL_PROBE: internal to mac80211, can be
772 * set by rate control algorithms to indicate probe rate, will
773 * be cleared for fragmented frames (except on the last fragment)
774 * @IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_OFFCHAN_TX_OK: Internal to mac80211. Used to indicate
775 * that a frame can be transmitted while the queues are stopped for
776 * off-channel operation.
777 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_HW_80211_ENCAP: This frame uses hardware encapsulation
778 * (header conversion)
779 * @IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_RETRIED: completely internal to mac80211,
780 * used to indicate that a frame was already retried due to PS
781 * @IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_DONT_ENCRYPT: completely internal to mac80211,
782 * used to indicate frame should not be encrypted
783 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_PS_BUFFER: This frame is a response to a poll
784 * frame (PS-Poll or uAPSD) or a non-bufferable MMPDU and must
785 * be sent although the station is in powersave mode.
786 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_MORE_FRAMES: More frames will be passed to the
787 * transmit function after the current frame, this can be used
788 * by drivers to kick the DMA queue only if unset or when the
789 * queue gets full.
790 * @IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_RETRANSMISSION: This frame is being retransmitted
791 * after TX status because the destination was asleep, it must not
792 * be modified again (no seqno assignment, crypto, etc.)
793 * @IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_MLME_CONN_TX: This frame was transmitted by the MLME
794 * code for connection establishment, this indicates that its status
795 * should kick the MLME state machine.
796 * @IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_NL80211_FRAME_TX: Frame was requested through nl80211
797 * MLME command (internal to mac80211 to figure out whether to send TX
798 * status to user space)
799 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_LDPC: tells the driver to use LDPC for this frame
800 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_STBC: Enables Space-Time Block Coding (STBC) for this
801 * frame and selects the maximum number of streams that it can use.
802 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_TX_OFFCHAN: Marks this packet to be transmitted on
803 * the off-channel channel when a remain-on-channel offload is done
804 * in hardware -- normal packets still flow and are expected to be
805 * handled properly by the device.
806 * @IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_TKIP_MIC_FAILURE: Marks this packet to be used for TKIP
807 * testing. It will be sent out with incorrect Michael MIC key to allow
808 * TKIP countermeasures to be tested.
809 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_CCK_RATE: This frame will be sent at non CCK rate.
810 * This flag is actually used for management frame especially for P2P
811 * frames not being sent at CCK rate in 2GHz band.
812 * @IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_EOSP: This packet marks the end of service period,
813 * when its status is reported the service period ends. For frames in
814 * an SP that mac80211 transmits, it is already set; for driver frames
815 * the driver may set this flag. It is also used to do the same for
816 * PS-Poll responses.
817 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_USE_MINRATE: This frame will be sent at lowest rate.
818 * This flag is used to send nullfunc frame at minimum rate when
819 * the nullfunc is used for connection monitoring purpose.
820 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_DONTFRAG: Don't fragment this packet even if it
821 * would be fragmented by size (this is optional, only used for
822 * monitor injection).
823 * @IEEE80211_TX_STAT_NOACK_TRANSMITTED: A frame that was marked with
824 * IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_ACK has been successfully transmitted without
825 * any errors (like issues specific to the driver/HW).
826 * This flag must not be set for frames that don't request no-ack
827 * behaviour with IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_ACK.
828 *
829 * Note: If you have to add new flags to the enumeration, then don't
830 * forget to update %IEEE80211_TX_TEMPORARY_FLAGS when necessary.
831 */
832 enum mac80211_tx_info_flags {
833 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_REQ_TX_STATUS = BIT(0),
834 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_ASSIGN_SEQ = BIT(1),
835 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_ACK = BIT(2),
836 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_CLEAR_PS_FILT = BIT(3),
837 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_FIRST_FRAGMENT = BIT(4),
838 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_SEND_AFTER_DTIM = BIT(5),
839 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_AMPDU = BIT(6),
840 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_INJECTED = BIT(7),
841 IEEE80211_TX_STAT_TX_FILTERED = BIT(8),
842 IEEE80211_TX_STAT_ACK = BIT(9),
843 IEEE80211_TX_STAT_AMPDU = BIT(10),
844 IEEE80211_TX_STAT_AMPDU_NO_BACK = BIT(11),
845 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_RATE_CTRL_PROBE = BIT(12),
846 IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_OFFCHAN_TX_OK = BIT(13),
847 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_HW_80211_ENCAP = BIT(14),
848 IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_RETRIED = BIT(15),
849 IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_DONT_ENCRYPT = BIT(16),
850 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_PS_BUFFER = BIT(17),
851 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_MORE_FRAMES = BIT(18),
852 IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_RETRANSMISSION = BIT(19),
853 IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_MLME_CONN_TX = BIT(20),
854 IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_NL80211_FRAME_TX = BIT(21),
855 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_LDPC = BIT(22),
856 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_STBC = BIT(23) | BIT(24),
857 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_TX_OFFCHAN = BIT(25),
858 IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_TKIP_MIC_FAILURE = BIT(26),
859 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_CCK_RATE = BIT(27),
860 IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_EOSP = BIT(28),
861 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_USE_MINRATE = BIT(29),
862 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_DONTFRAG = BIT(30),
863 IEEE80211_TX_STAT_NOACK_TRANSMITTED = BIT(31),
864 };
865
866 #define IEEE80211_TX_CTL_STBC_SHIFT 23
867
868 #define IEEE80211_TX_RC_S1G_MCS IEEE80211_TX_RC_VHT_MCS
869
870 /**
871 * enum mac80211_tx_control_flags - flags to describe transmit control
872 *
873 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_PORT_CTRL_PROTO: this frame is a port control
874 * protocol frame (e.g. EAP)
875 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_PS_RESPONSE: This frame is a response to a poll
876 * frame (PS-Poll or uAPSD).
877 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_RATE_INJECT: This frame is injected with rate information
878 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_AMSDU: This frame is an A-MSDU frame
879 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_FAST_XMIT: This frame is going through the fast_xmit path
880 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_SKIP_MPATH_LOOKUP: This frame skips mesh path lookup
881 * @IEEE80211_TX_INTCFL_NEED_TXPROCESSING: completely internal to mac80211,
882 * used to indicate that a pending frame requires TX processing before
883 * it can be sent out.
884 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_NO_SEQNO: Do not overwrite the sequence number that
885 * has already been assigned to this frame.
886 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_DONT_REORDER: This frame should not be reordered
887 * relative to other frames that have this flag set, independent
888 * of their QoS TID or other priority field values.
889 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_MCAST_MLO_FIRST_TX: first MLO TX, used mostly internally
890 * for sequence number assignment
891 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_MLO_LINK: If not @IEEE80211_LINK_UNSPECIFIED, this
892 * frame should be transmitted on the specific link. This really is
893 * only relevant for frames that do not have data present, and is
894 * also not used for 802.3 format frames. Note that even if the frame
895 * is on a specific link, address translation might still apply if
896 * it's intended for an MLD.
897 *
898 * These flags are used in tx_info->control.flags.
899 */
900 enum mac80211_tx_control_flags {
901 IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_PORT_CTRL_PROTO = BIT(0),
902 IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_PS_RESPONSE = BIT(1),
903 IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_RATE_INJECT = BIT(2),
904 IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_AMSDU = BIT(3),
905 IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_FAST_XMIT = BIT(4),
906 IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_SKIP_MPATH_LOOKUP = BIT(5),
907 IEEE80211_TX_INTCFL_NEED_TXPROCESSING = BIT(6),
908 IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_NO_SEQNO = BIT(7),
909 IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_DONT_REORDER = BIT(8),
910 IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_MCAST_MLO_FIRST_TX = BIT(9),
911 IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_MLO_LINK = 0xf0000000,
912 };
913
914 #define IEEE80211_LINK_UNSPECIFIED 0xf
915 #define IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_MLO_LINK_UNSPEC \
916 u32_encode_bits(IEEE80211_LINK_UNSPECIFIED, \
917 IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_MLO_LINK)
918
919 /**
920 * enum mac80211_tx_status_flags - flags to describe transmit status
921 *
922 * @IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_ACK_SIGNAL_VALID: ACK signal is valid
923 *
924 * These flags are used in tx_info->status.flags.
925 */
926 enum mac80211_tx_status_flags {
927 IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_ACK_SIGNAL_VALID = BIT(0),
928 };
929
930 /*
931 * This definition is used as a mask to clear all temporary flags, which are
932 * set by the tx handlers for each transmission attempt by the mac80211 stack.
933 */
934 #define IEEE80211_TX_TEMPORARY_FLAGS (IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_ACK | \
935 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_CLEAR_PS_FILT | IEEE80211_TX_CTL_FIRST_FRAGMENT | \
936 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_SEND_AFTER_DTIM | IEEE80211_TX_CTL_AMPDU | \
937 IEEE80211_TX_STAT_TX_FILTERED | IEEE80211_TX_STAT_ACK | \
938 IEEE80211_TX_STAT_AMPDU | IEEE80211_TX_STAT_AMPDU_NO_BACK | \
939 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_RATE_CTRL_PROBE | IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_PS_BUFFER | \
940 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_MORE_FRAMES | IEEE80211_TX_CTL_LDPC | \
941 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_STBC | IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_EOSP)
942
943 /**
944 * enum mac80211_rate_control_flags - per-rate flags set by the
945 * Rate Control algorithm.
946 *
947 * These flags are set by the Rate control algorithm for each rate during tx,
948 * in the @flags member of struct ieee80211_tx_rate.
949 *
950 * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_USE_RTS_CTS: Use RTS/CTS exchange for this rate.
951 * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_USE_CTS_PROTECT: CTS-to-self protection is required.
952 * This is set if the current BSS requires ERP protection.
953 * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_USE_SHORT_PREAMBLE: Use short preamble.
954 * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_MCS: HT rate.
955 * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_VHT_MCS: VHT MCS rate, in this case the idx field is split
956 * into a higher 4 bits (Nss) and lower 4 bits (MCS number)
957 * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_GREEN_FIELD: Indicates whether this rate should be used in
958 * Greenfield mode.
959 * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_40_MHZ_WIDTH: Indicates if the Channel Width should be 40 MHz.
960 * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_80_MHZ_WIDTH: Indicates 80 MHz transmission
961 * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_160_MHZ_WIDTH: Indicates 160 MHz transmission
962 * (80+80 isn't supported yet)
963 * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_DUP_DATA: The frame should be transmitted on both of the
964 * adjacent 20 MHz channels, if the current channel type is
965 * NL80211_CHAN_HT40MINUS or NL80211_CHAN_HT40PLUS.
966 * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_SHORT_GI: Short Guard interval should be used for this rate.
967 */
968 enum mac80211_rate_control_flags {
969 IEEE80211_TX_RC_USE_RTS_CTS = BIT(0),
970 IEEE80211_TX_RC_USE_CTS_PROTECT = BIT(1),
971 IEEE80211_TX_RC_USE_SHORT_PREAMBLE = BIT(2),
972
973 /* rate index is an HT/VHT MCS instead of an index */
974 IEEE80211_TX_RC_MCS = BIT(3),
975 IEEE80211_TX_RC_GREEN_FIELD = BIT(4),
976 IEEE80211_TX_RC_40_MHZ_WIDTH = BIT(5),
977 IEEE80211_TX_RC_DUP_DATA = BIT(6),
978 IEEE80211_TX_RC_SHORT_GI = BIT(7),
979 IEEE80211_TX_RC_VHT_MCS = BIT(8),
980 IEEE80211_TX_RC_80_MHZ_WIDTH = BIT(9),
981 IEEE80211_TX_RC_160_MHZ_WIDTH = BIT(10),
982 };
983
984
985 /* there are 40 bytes if you don't need the rateset to be kept */
986 #define IEEE80211_TX_INFO_DRIVER_DATA_SIZE 40
987
988 /* if you do need the rateset, then you have less space */
989 #define IEEE80211_TX_INFO_RATE_DRIVER_DATA_SIZE 24
990
991 /* maximum number of rate stages */
992 #define IEEE80211_TX_MAX_RATES 4
993
994 /* maximum number of rate table entries */
995 #define IEEE80211_TX_RATE_TABLE_SIZE 4
996
997 /**
998 * struct ieee80211_tx_rate - rate selection/status
999 *
1000 * @idx: rate index to attempt to send with
1001 * @flags: rate control flags (&enum mac80211_rate_control_flags)
1002 * @count: number of tries in this rate before going to the next rate
1003 *
1004 * A value of -1 for @idx indicates an invalid rate and, if used
1005 * in an array of retry rates, that no more rates should be tried.
1006 *
1007 * When used for transmit status reporting, the driver should
1008 * always report the rate along with the flags it used.
1009 *
1010 * &struct ieee80211_tx_info contains an array of these structs
1011 * in the control information, and it will be filled by the rate
1012 * control algorithm according to what should be sent. For example,
1013 * if this array contains, in the format { <idx>, <count> } the
1014 * information::
1015 *
1016 * { 3, 2 }, { 2, 2 }, { 1, 4 }, { -1, 0 }, { -1, 0 }
1017 *
1018 * then this means that the frame should be transmitted
1019 * up to twice at rate 3, up to twice at rate 2, and up to four
1020 * times at rate 1 if it doesn't get acknowledged. Say it gets
1021 * acknowledged by the peer after the fifth attempt, the status
1022 * information should then contain::
1023 *
1024 * { 3, 2 }, { 2, 2 }, { 1, 1 }, { -1, 0 } ...
1025 *
1026 * since it was transmitted twice at rate 3, twice at rate 2
1027 * and once at rate 1 after which we received an acknowledgement.
1028 */
1029 struct ieee80211_tx_rate {
1030 s8 idx;
1031 u16 count:5,
1032 flags:11;
1033 } __packed;
1034
1035 #define IEEE80211_MAX_TX_RETRY 31
1036
ieee80211_rate_set_vht(struct ieee80211_tx_rate * rate,u8 mcs,u8 nss)1037 static inline void ieee80211_rate_set_vht(struct ieee80211_tx_rate *rate,
1038 u8 mcs, u8 nss)
1039 {
1040 WARN_ON(mcs & ~0xF);
1041 WARN_ON((nss - 1) & ~0x7);
1042 rate->idx = ((nss - 1) << 4) | mcs;
1043 }
1044
1045 static inline u8
ieee80211_rate_get_vht_mcs(const struct ieee80211_tx_rate * rate)1046 ieee80211_rate_get_vht_mcs(const struct ieee80211_tx_rate *rate)
1047 {
1048 return rate->idx & 0xF;
1049 }
1050
1051 static inline u8
ieee80211_rate_get_vht_nss(const struct ieee80211_tx_rate * rate)1052 ieee80211_rate_get_vht_nss(const struct ieee80211_tx_rate *rate)
1053 {
1054 return (rate->idx >> 4) + 1;
1055 }
1056
1057 /**
1058 * struct ieee80211_tx_info - skb transmit information
1059 *
1060 * This structure is placed in skb->cb for three uses:
1061 * (1) mac80211 TX control - mac80211 tells the driver what to do
1062 * (2) driver internal use (if applicable)
1063 * (3) TX status information - driver tells mac80211 what happened
1064 *
1065 * @flags: transmit info flags, defined above
1066 * @band: the band to transmit on (use e.g. for checking for races),
1067 * not valid if the interface is an MLD since we won't know which
1068 * link the frame will be transmitted on
1069 * @hw_queue: HW queue to put the frame on, skb_get_queue_mapping() gives the AC
1070 * @ack_frame_id: internal frame ID for TX status, used internally
1071 * @tx_time_est: TX time estimate in units of 4us, used internally
1072 * @control: union part for control data
1073 * @control.rates: TX rates array to try
1074 * @control.rts_cts_rate_idx: rate for RTS or CTS
1075 * @control.use_rts: use RTS
1076 * @control.use_cts_prot: use RTS/CTS
1077 * @control.short_preamble: use short preamble (CCK only)
1078 * @control.skip_table: skip externally configured rate table
1079 * @control.jiffies: timestamp for expiry on powersave clients
1080 * @control.vif: virtual interface (may be NULL)
1081 * @control.hw_key: key to encrypt with (may be NULL)
1082 * @control.flags: control flags, see &enum mac80211_tx_control_flags
1083 * @control.enqueue_time: enqueue time (for iTXQs)
1084 * @driver_rates: alias to @control.rates to reserve space
1085 * @pad: padding
1086 * @rate_driver_data: driver use area if driver needs @control.rates
1087 * @status: union part for status data
1088 * @status.rates: attempted rates
1089 * @status.ack_signal: ACK signal
1090 * @status.ampdu_ack_len: AMPDU ack length
1091 * @status.ampdu_len: AMPDU length
1092 * @status.antenna: (legacy, kept only for iwlegacy)
1093 * @status.tx_time: airtime consumed for transmission; note this is only
1094 * used for WMM AC, not for airtime fairness
1095 * @status.flags: status flags, see &enum mac80211_tx_status_flags
1096 * @status.status_driver_data: driver use area
1097 * @ack: union part for pure ACK data
1098 * @ack.cookie: cookie for the ACK
1099 * @driver_data: array of driver_data pointers
1100 * @ampdu_ack_len: number of acked aggregated frames.
1101 * relevant only if IEEE80211_TX_STAT_AMPDU was set.
1102 * @ampdu_len: number of aggregated frames.
1103 * relevant only if IEEE80211_TX_STAT_AMPDU was set.
1104 * @ack_signal: signal strength of the ACK frame
1105 */
1106 struct ieee80211_tx_info {
1107 /* common information */
1108 u32 flags;
1109 u32 band:3,
1110 ack_frame_id:13,
1111 hw_queue:4,
1112 tx_time_est:10;
1113 /* 2 free bits */
1114
1115 union {
1116 struct {
1117 union {
1118 /* rate control */
1119 struct {
1120 struct ieee80211_tx_rate rates[
1121 IEEE80211_TX_MAX_RATES];
1122 s8 rts_cts_rate_idx;
1123 u8 use_rts:1;
1124 u8 use_cts_prot:1;
1125 u8 short_preamble:1;
1126 u8 skip_table:1;
1127 /* 2 bytes free */
1128 };
1129 /* only needed before rate control */
1130 unsigned long jiffies;
1131 };
1132 /* NB: vif can be NULL for injected frames */
1133 struct ieee80211_vif *vif;
1134 struct ieee80211_key_conf *hw_key;
1135 u32 flags;
1136 codel_time_t enqueue_time;
1137 } control;
1138 struct {
1139 u64 cookie;
1140 } ack;
1141 struct {
1142 struct ieee80211_tx_rate rates[IEEE80211_TX_MAX_RATES];
1143 s32 ack_signal;
1144 u8 ampdu_ack_len;
1145 u8 ampdu_len;
1146 u8 antenna;
1147 u8 pad;
1148 u16 tx_time;
1149 u8 flags;
1150 u8 pad2;
1151 void *status_driver_data[16 / sizeof(void *)];
1152 } status;
1153 struct {
1154 struct ieee80211_tx_rate driver_rates[
1155 IEEE80211_TX_MAX_RATES];
1156 u8 pad[4];
1157
1158 void *rate_driver_data[
1159 IEEE80211_TX_INFO_RATE_DRIVER_DATA_SIZE / sizeof(void *)];
1160 };
1161
1162 ANDROID_KABI_RESERVE(1);
1163
1164 void *driver_data[
1165 IEEE80211_TX_INFO_DRIVER_DATA_SIZE / sizeof(void *)];
1166 };
1167 };
1168
1169 static inline u16
ieee80211_info_set_tx_time_est(struct ieee80211_tx_info * info,u16 tx_time_est)1170 ieee80211_info_set_tx_time_est(struct ieee80211_tx_info *info, u16 tx_time_est)
1171 {
1172 /* We only have 10 bits in tx_time_est, so store airtime
1173 * in increments of 4us and clamp the maximum to 2**12-1
1174 */
1175 info->tx_time_est = min_t(u16, tx_time_est, 4095) >> 2;
1176 return info->tx_time_est << 2;
1177 }
1178
1179 static inline u16
ieee80211_info_get_tx_time_est(struct ieee80211_tx_info * info)1180 ieee80211_info_get_tx_time_est(struct ieee80211_tx_info *info)
1181 {
1182 return info->tx_time_est << 2;
1183 }
1184
1185 /***
1186 * struct ieee80211_rate_status - mrr stage for status path
1187 *
1188 * This struct is used in struct ieee80211_tx_status to provide drivers a
1189 * dynamic way to report about used rates and power levels per packet.
1190 *
1191 * @rate_idx The actual used rate.
1192 * @try_count How often the rate was tried.
1193 * @tx_power_idx An idx into the ieee80211_hw->tx_power_levels list of the
1194 * corresponding wifi hardware. The idx shall point to the power level
1195 * that was used when sending the packet.
1196 */
1197 struct ieee80211_rate_status {
1198 struct rate_info rate_idx;
1199 u8 try_count;
1200 u8 tx_power_idx;
1201 };
1202
1203 /**
1204 * struct ieee80211_tx_status - extended tx status info for rate control
1205 *
1206 * @sta: Station that the packet was transmitted for
1207 * @info: Basic tx status information
1208 * @skb: Packet skb (can be NULL if not provided by the driver)
1209 * @rates: Mrr stages that were used when sending the packet
1210 * @n_rates: Number of mrr stages (count of instances for @rates)
1211 * @free_list: list where processed skbs are stored to be free'd by the driver
1212 * @ack_hwtstamp: Hardware timestamp of the received ack in nanoseconds
1213 * Only needed for Timing measurement and Fine timing measurement action
1214 * frames. Only reported by devices that have timestamping enabled.
1215 */
1216 struct ieee80211_tx_status {
1217 struct ieee80211_sta *sta;
1218 struct ieee80211_tx_info *info;
1219 struct sk_buff *skb;
1220 struct ieee80211_rate_status *rates;
1221 ktime_t ack_hwtstamp;
1222 u8 n_rates;
1223
1224 struct list_head *free_list;
1225 };
1226
1227 /**
1228 * struct ieee80211_scan_ies - descriptors for different blocks of IEs
1229 *
1230 * This structure is used to point to different blocks of IEs in HW scan
1231 * and scheduled scan. These blocks contain the IEs passed by userspace
1232 * and the ones generated by mac80211.
1233 *
1234 * @ies: pointers to band specific IEs.
1235 * @len: lengths of band_specific IEs.
1236 * @common_ies: IEs for all bands (especially vendor specific ones)
1237 * @common_ie_len: length of the common_ies
1238 */
1239 struct ieee80211_scan_ies {
1240 const u8 *ies[NUM_NL80211_BANDS];
1241 size_t len[NUM_NL80211_BANDS];
1242 const u8 *common_ies;
1243 size_t common_ie_len;
1244 };
1245
1246
IEEE80211_SKB_CB(struct sk_buff * skb)1247 static inline struct ieee80211_tx_info *IEEE80211_SKB_CB(struct sk_buff *skb)
1248 {
1249 return (struct ieee80211_tx_info *)skb->cb;
1250 }
1251
IEEE80211_SKB_RXCB(struct sk_buff * skb)1252 static inline struct ieee80211_rx_status *IEEE80211_SKB_RXCB(struct sk_buff *skb)
1253 {
1254 return (struct ieee80211_rx_status *)skb->cb;
1255 }
1256
1257 /**
1258 * ieee80211_tx_info_clear_status - clear TX status
1259 *
1260 * @info: The &struct ieee80211_tx_info to be cleared.
1261 *
1262 * When the driver passes an skb back to mac80211, it must report
1263 * a number of things in TX status. This function clears everything
1264 * in the TX status but the rate control information (it does clear
1265 * the count since you need to fill that in anyway).
1266 *
1267 * NOTE: While the rates array is kept intact, this will wipe all of the
1268 * driver_data fields in info, so it's up to the driver to restore
1269 * any fields it needs after calling this helper.
1270 */
1271 static inline void
ieee80211_tx_info_clear_status(struct ieee80211_tx_info * info)1272 ieee80211_tx_info_clear_status(struct ieee80211_tx_info *info)
1273 {
1274 int i;
1275
1276 BUILD_BUG_ON(offsetof(struct ieee80211_tx_info, status.rates) !=
1277 offsetof(struct ieee80211_tx_info, control.rates));
1278 BUILD_BUG_ON(offsetof(struct ieee80211_tx_info, status.rates) !=
1279 offsetof(struct ieee80211_tx_info, driver_rates));
1280 BUILD_BUG_ON(offsetof(struct ieee80211_tx_info, status.rates) != 8);
1281 /* clear the rate counts */
1282 for (i = 0; i < IEEE80211_TX_MAX_RATES; i++)
1283 info->status.rates[i].count = 0;
1284 memset_after(&info->status, 0, rates);
1285 }
1286
1287
1288 /**
1289 * enum mac80211_rx_flags - receive flags
1290 *
1291 * These flags are used with the @flag member of &struct ieee80211_rx_status.
1292 * @RX_FLAG_MMIC_ERROR: Michael MIC error was reported on this frame.
1293 * Use together with %RX_FLAG_MMIC_STRIPPED.
1294 * @RX_FLAG_DECRYPTED: This frame was decrypted in hardware.
1295 * @RX_FLAG_MMIC_STRIPPED: the Michael MIC is stripped off this frame,
1296 * verification has been done by the hardware.
1297 * @RX_FLAG_IV_STRIPPED: The IV and ICV are stripped from this frame.
1298 * If this flag is set, the stack cannot do any replay detection
1299 * hence the driver or hardware will have to do that.
1300 * @RX_FLAG_PN_VALIDATED: Currently only valid for CCMP/GCMP frames, this
1301 * flag indicates that the PN was verified for replay protection.
1302 * Note that this flag is also currently only supported when a frame
1303 * is also decrypted (ie. @RX_FLAG_DECRYPTED must be set)
1304 * @RX_FLAG_DUP_VALIDATED: The driver should set this flag if it did
1305 * de-duplication by itself.
1306 * @RX_FLAG_FAILED_FCS_CRC: Set this flag if the FCS check failed on
1307 * the frame.
1308 * @RX_FLAG_FAILED_PLCP_CRC: Set this flag if the PCLP check failed on
1309 * the frame.
1310 * @RX_FLAG_MACTIME_START: The timestamp passed in the RX status (@mactime
1311 * field) is valid and contains the time the first symbol of the MPDU
1312 * was received. This is useful in monitor mode and for proper IBSS
1313 * merging.
1314 * @RX_FLAG_MACTIME_END: The timestamp passed in the RX status (@mactime
1315 * field) is valid and contains the time the last symbol of the MPDU
1316 * (including FCS) was received.
1317 * @RX_FLAG_MACTIME_PLCP_START: The timestamp passed in the RX status (@mactime
1318 * field) is valid and contains the time the SYNC preamble was received.
1319 * @RX_FLAG_NO_SIGNAL_VAL: The signal strength value is not present.
1320 * Valid only for data frames (mainly A-MPDU)
1321 * @RX_FLAG_AMPDU_DETAILS: A-MPDU details are known, in particular the reference
1322 * number (@ampdu_reference) must be populated and be a distinct number for
1323 * each A-MPDU
1324 * @RX_FLAG_AMPDU_LAST_KNOWN: last subframe is known, should be set on all
1325 * subframes of a single A-MPDU
1326 * @RX_FLAG_AMPDU_IS_LAST: this subframe is the last subframe of the A-MPDU
1327 * @RX_FLAG_AMPDU_DELIM_CRC_ERROR: A delimiter CRC error has been detected
1328 * on this subframe
1329 * @RX_FLAG_AMPDU_DELIM_CRC_KNOWN: The delimiter CRC field is known (the CRC
1330 * is stored in the @ampdu_delimiter_crc field)
1331 * @RX_FLAG_MIC_STRIPPED: The mic was stripped of this packet. Decryption was
1332 * done by the hardware
1333 * @RX_FLAG_ONLY_MONITOR: Report frame only to monitor interfaces without
1334 * processing it in any regular way.
1335 * This is useful if drivers offload some frames but still want to report
1336 * them for sniffing purposes.
1337 * @RX_FLAG_SKIP_MONITOR: Process and report frame to all interfaces except
1338 * monitor interfaces.
1339 * This is useful if drivers offload some frames but still want to report
1340 * them for sniffing purposes.
1341 * @RX_FLAG_AMSDU_MORE: Some drivers may prefer to report separate A-MSDU
1342 * subframes instead of a one huge frame for performance reasons.
1343 * All, but the last MSDU from an A-MSDU should have this flag set. E.g.
1344 * if an A-MSDU has 3 frames, the first 2 must have the flag set, while
1345 * the 3rd (last) one must not have this flag set. The flag is used to
1346 * deal with retransmission/duplication recovery properly since A-MSDU
1347 * subframes share the same sequence number. Reported subframes can be
1348 * either regular MSDU or singly A-MSDUs. Subframes must not be
1349 * interleaved with other frames.
1350 * @RX_FLAG_RADIOTAP_VENDOR_DATA: This frame contains vendor-specific
1351 * radiotap data in the skb->data (before the frame) as described by
1352 * the &struct ieee80211_vendor_radiotap.
1353 * @RX_FLAG_ALLOW_SAME_PN: Allow the same PN as same packet before.
1354 * This is used for AMSDU subframes which can have the same PN as
1355 * the first subframe.
1356 * @RX_FLAG_ICV_STRIPPED: The ICV is stripped from this frame. CRC checking must
1357 * be done in the hardware.
1358 * @RX_FLAG_AMPDU_EOF_BIT: Value of the EOF bit in the A-MPDU delimiter for this
1359 * frame
1360 * @RX_FLAG_AMPDU_EOF_BIT_KNOWN: The EOF value is known
1361 * @RX_FLAG_RADIOTAP_HE: HE radiotap data is present
1362 * (&struct ieee80211_radiotap_he, mac80211 will fill in
1363 *
1364 * - DATA3_DATA_MCS
1365 * - DATA3_DATA_DCM
1366 * - DATA3_CODING
1367 * - DATA5_GI
1368 * - DATA5_DATA_BW_RU_ALLOC
1369 * - DATA6_NSTS
1370 * - DATA3_STBC
1371 *
1372 * from the RX info data, so leave those zeroed when building this data)
1373 * @RX_FLAG_RADIOTAP_HE_MU: HE MU radiotap data is present
1374 * (&struct ieee80211_radiotap_he_mu)
1375 * @RX_FLAG_RADIOTAP_LSIG: L-SIG radiotap data is present
1376 * @RX_FLAG_NO_PSDU: use the frame only for radiotap reporting, with
1377 * the "0-length PSDU" field included there. The value for it is
1378 * in &struct ieee80211_rx_status. Note that if this value isn't
1379 * known the frame shouldn't be reported.
1380 * @RX_FLAG_8023: the frame has an 802.3 header (decap offload performed by
1381 * hardware or driver)
1382 */
1383 enum mac80211_rx_flags {
1384 RX_FLAG_MMIC_ERROR = BIT(0),
1385 RX_FLAG_DECRYPTED = BIT(1),
1386 RX_FLAG_MACTIME_PLCP_START = BIT(2),
1387 RX_FLAG_MMIC_STRIPPED = BIT(3),
1388 RX_FLAG_IV_STRIPPED = BIT(4),
1389 RX_FLAG_FAILED_FCS_CRC = BIT(5),
1390 RX_FLAG_FAILED_PLCP_CRC = BIT(6),
1391 RX_FLAG_MACTIME_START = BIT(7),
1392 RX_FLAG_NO_SIGNAL_VAL = BIT(8),
1393 RX_FLAG_AMPDU_DETAILS = BIT(9),
1394 RX_FLAG_PN_VALIDATED = BIT(10),
1395 RX_FLAG_DUP_VALIDATED = BIT(11),
1396 RX_FLAG_AMPDU_LAST_KNOWN = BIT(12),
1397 RX_FLAG_AMPDU_IS_LAST = BIT(13),
1398 RX_FLAG_AMPDU_DELIM_CRC_ERROR = BIT(14),
1399 RX_FLAG_AMPDU_DELIM_CRC_KNOWN = BIT(15),
1400 RX_FLAG_MACTIME_END = BIT(16),
1401 RX_FLAG_ONLY_MONITOR = BIT(17),
1402 RX_FLAG_SKIP_MONITOR = BIT(18),
1403 RX_FLAG_AMSDU_MORE = BIT(19),
1404 RX_FLAG_RADIOTAP_VENDOR_DATA = BIT(20),
1405 RX_FLAG_MIC_STRIPPED = BIT(21),
1406 RX_FLAG_ALLOW_SAME_PN = BIT(22),
1407 RX_FLAG_ICV_STRIPPED = BIT(23),
1408 RX_FLAG_AMPDU_EOF_BIT = BIT(24),
1409 RX_FLAG_AMPDU_EOF_BIT_KNOWN = BIT(25),
1410 RX_FLAG_RADIOTAP_HE = BIT(26),
1411 RX_FLAG_RADIOTAP_HE_MU = BIT(27),
1412 RX_FLAG_RADIOTAP_LSIG = BIT(28),
1413 RX_FLAG_NO_PSDU = BIT(29),
1414 RX_FLAG_8023 = BIT(30),
1415 };
1416
1417 /**
1418 * enum mac80211_rx_encoding_flags - MCS & bandwidth flags
1419 *
1420 * @RX_ENC_FLAG_SHORTPRE: Short preamble was used for this frame
1421 * @RX_ENC_FLAG_SHORT_GI: Short guard interval was used
1422 * @RX_ENC_FLAG_HT_GF: This frame was received in a HT-greenfield transmission,
1423 * if the driver fills this value it should add
1424 * %IEEE80211_RADIOTAP_MCS_HAVE_FMT
1425 * to @hw.radiotap_mcs_details to advertise that fact.
1426 * @RX_ENC_FLAG_LDPC: LDPC was used
1427 * @RX_ENC_FLAG_STBC_MASK: STBC 2 bit bitmask. 1 - Nss=1, 2 - Nss=2, 3 - Nss=3
1428 * @RX_ENC_FLAG_BF: packet was beamformed
1429 */
1430 enum mac80211_rx_encoding_flags {
1431 RX_ENC_FLAG_SHORTPRE = BIT(0),
1432 RX_ENC_FLAG_SHORT_GI = BIT(2),
1433 RX_ENC_FLAG_HT_GF = BIT(3),
1434 RX_ENC_FLAG_STBC_MASK = BIT(4) | BIT(5),
1435 RX_ENC_FLAG_LDPC = BIT(6),
1436 RX_ENC_FLAG_BF = BIT(7),
1437 };
1438
1439 #define RX_ENC_FLAG_STBC_SHIFT 4
1440
1441 enum mac80211_rx_encoding {
1442 RX_ENC_LEGACY = 0,
1443 RX_ENC_HT,
1444 RX_ENC_VHT,
1445 RX_ENC_HE,
1446 };
1447
1448 /**
1449 * struct ieee80211_rx_status - receive status
1450 *
1451 * The low-level driver should provide this information (the subset
1452 * supported by hardware) to the 802.11 code with each received
1453 * frame, in the skb's control buffer (cb).
1454 *
1455 * @mactime: value in microseconds of the 64-bit Time Synchronization Function
1456 * (TSF) timer when the first data symbol (MPDU) arrived at the hardware.
1457 * @boottime_ns: CLOCK_BOOTTIME timestamp the frame was received at, this is
1458 * needed only for beacons and probe responses that update the scan cache.
1459 * @ack_tx_hwtstamp: Hardware timestamp for the ack TX in nanoseconds. Only
1460 * needed for Timing measurement and Fine timing measurement action frames.
1461 * Only reported by devices that have timestamping enabled.
1462 * @device_timestamp: arbitrary timestamp for the device, mac80211 doesn't use
1463 * it but can store it and pass it back to the driver for synchronisation
1464 * @band: the active band when this frame was received
1465 * @freq: frequency the radio was tuned to when receiving this frame, in MHz
1466 * This field must be set for management frames, but isn't strictly needed
1467 * for data (other) frames - for those it only affects radiotap reporting.
1468 * @freq_offset: @freq has a positive offset of 500Khz.
1469 * @signal: signal strength when receiving this frame, either in dBm, in dB or
1470 * unspecified depending on the hardware capabilities flags
1471 * @IEEE80211_HW_SIGNAL_*
1472 * @chains: bitmask of receive chains for which separate signal strength
1473 * values were filled.
1474 * @chain_signal: per-chain signal strength, in dBm (unlike @signal, doesn't
1475 * support dB or unspecified units)
1476 * @antenna: antenna used
1477 * @rate_idx: index of data rate into band's supported rates or MCS index if
1478 * HT or VHT is used (%RX_FLAG_HT/%RX_FLAG_VHT)
1479 * @nss: number of streams (VHT and HE only)
1480 * @flag: %RX_FLAG_\*
1481 * @encoding: &enum mac80211_rx_encoding
1482 * @bw: &enum rate_info_bw
1483 * @enc_flags: uses bits from &enum mac80211_rx_encoding_flags
1484 * @he_ru: HE RU, from &enum nl80211_he_ru_alloc
1485 * @he_gi: HE GI, from &enum nl80211_he_gi
1486 * @he_dcm: HE DCM value
1487 * @rx_flags: internal RX flags for mac80211
1488 * @ampdu_reference: A-MPDU reference number, must be a different value for
1489 * each A-MPDU but the same for each subframe within one A-MPDU
1490 * @ampdu_delimiter_crc: A-MPDU delimiter CRC
1491 * @zero_length_psdu_type: radiotap type of the 0-length PSDU
1492 * @link_valid: if the link which is identified by @link_id is valid. This flag
1493 * is set only when connection is MLO.
1494 * @link_id: id of the link used to receive the packet. This is used along with
1495 * @link_valid.
1496 */
1497 struct ieee80211_rx_status {
1498 u64 mactime;
1499 union {
1500 u64 boottime_ns;
1501 ktime_t ack_tx_hwtstamp;
1502 };
1503 u32 device_timestamp;
1504 u32 ampdu_reference;
1505 u32 flag;
1506 u16 freq: 13, freq_offset: 1;
1507 u8 enc_flags;
1508 u8 encoding:2, bw:3, he_ru:3;
1509 u8 he_gi:2, he_dcm:1;
1510 u8 rate_idx;
1511 u8 nss;
1512 u8 rx_flags;
1513 u8 band;
1514 u8 antenna;
1515 s8 signal;
1516 u8 chains;
1517 s8 chain_signal[IEEE80211_MAX_CHAINS];
1518 u8 ampdu_delimiter_crc;
1519 u8 zero_length_psdu_type;
1520 u8 link_valid:1, link_id:4;
1521 };
1522
1523 static inline u32
ieee80211_rx_status_to_khz(struct ieee80211_rx_status * rx_status)1524 ieee80211_rx_status_to_khz(struct ieee80211_rx_status *rx_status)
1525 {
1526 return MHZ_TO_KHZ(rx_status->freq) +
1527 (rx_status->freq_offset ? 500 : 0);
1528 }
1529
1530 /**
1531 * struct ieee80211_vendor_radiotap - vendor radiotap data information
1532 * @present: presence bitmap for this vendor namespace
1533 * (this could be extended in the future if any vendor needs more
1534 * bits, the radiotap spec does allow for that)
1535 * @align: radiotap vendor namespace alignment. This defines the needed
1536 * alignment for the @data field below, not for the vendor namespace
1537 * description itself (which has a fixed 2-byte alignment)
1538 * Must be a power of two, and be set to at least 1!
1539 * @oui: radiotap vendor namespace OUI
1540 * @subns: radiotap vendor sub namespace
1541 * @len: radiotap vendor sub namespace skip length, if alignment is done
1542 * then that's added to this, i.e. this is only the length of the
1543 * @data field.
1544 * @pad: number of bytes of padding after the @data, this exists so that
1545 * the skb data alignment can be preserved even if the data has odd
1546 * length
1547 * @data: the actual vendor namespace data
1548 *
1549 * This struct, including the vendor data, goes into the skb->data before
1550 * the 802.11 header. It's split up in mac80211 using the align/oui/subns
1551 * data.
1552 */
1553 struct ieee80211_vendor_radiotap {
1554 u32 present;
1555 u8 align;
1556 u8 oui[3];
1557 u8 subns;
1558 u8 pad;
1559 u16 len;
1560 u8 data[];
1561 } __packed;
1562
1563 /**
1564 * enum ieee80211_conf_flags - configuration flags
1565 *
1566 * Flags to define PHY configuration options
1567 *
1568 * @IEEE80211_CONF_MONITOR: there's a monitor interface present -- use this
1569 * to determine for example whether to calculate timestamps for packets
1570 * or not, do not use instead of filter flags!
1571 * @IEEE80211_CONF_PS: Enable 802.11 power save mode (managed mode only).
1572 * This is the power save mode defined by IEEE 802.11-2007 section 11.2,
1573 * meaning that the hardware still wakes up for beacons, is able to
1574 * transmit frames and receive the possible acknowledgment frames.
1575 * Not to be confused with hardware specific wakeup/sleep states,
1576 * driver is responsible for that. See the section "Powersave support"
1577 * for more.
1578 * @IEEE80211_CONF_IDLE: The device is running, but idle; if the flag is set
1579 * the driver should be prepared to handle configuration requests but
1580 * may turn the device off as much as possible. Typically, this flag will
1581 * be set when an interface is set UP but not associated or scanning, but
1582 * it can also be unset in that case when monitor interfaces are active.
1583 * @IEEE80211_CONF_OFFCHANNEL: The device is currently not on its main
1584 * operating channel.
1585 */
1586 enum ieee80211_conf_flags {
1587 IEEE80211_CONF_MONITOR = (1<<0),
1588 IEEE80211_CONF_PS = (1<<1),
1589 IEEE80211_CONF_IDLE = (1<<2),
1590 IEEE80211_CONF_OFFCHANNEL = (1<<3),
1591 };
1592
1593
1594 /**
1595 * enum ieee80211_conf_changed - denotes which configuration changed
1596 *
1597 * @IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_LISTEN_INTERVAL: the listen interval changed
1598 * @IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_MONITOR: the monitor flag changed
1599 * @IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_PS: the PS flag or dynamic PS timeout changed
1600 * @IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_POWER: the TX power changed
1601 * @IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_CHANNEL: the channel/channel_type changed
1602 * @IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_RETRY_LIMITS: retry limits changed
1603 * @IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_IDLE: Idle flag changed
1604 * @IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_SMPS: Spatial multiplexing powersave mode changed
1605 * Note that this is only valid if channel contexts are not used,
1606 * otherwise each channel context has the number of chains listed.
1607 */
1608 enum ieee80211_conf_changed {
1609 IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_SMPS = BIT(1),
1610 IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_LISTEN_INTERVAL = BIT(2),
1611 IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_MONITOR = BIT(3),
1612 IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_PS = BIT(4),
1613 IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_POWER = BIT(5),
1614 IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_CHANNEL = BIT(6),
1615 IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_RETRY_LIMITS = BIT(7),
1616 IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_IDLE = BIT(8),
1617 };
1618
1619 /**
1620 * enum ieee80211_smps_mode - spatial multiplexing power save mode
1621 *
1622 * @IEEE80211_SMPS_AUTOMATIC: automatic
1623 * @IEEE80211_SMPS_OFF: off
1624 * @IEEE80211_SMPS_STATIC: static
1625 * @IEEE80211_SMPS_DYNAMIC: dynamic
1626 * @IEEE80211_SMPS_NUM_MODES: internal, don't use
1627 */
1628 enum ieee80211_smps_mode {
1629 IEEE80211_SMPS_AUTOMATIC,
1630 IEEE80211_SMPS_OFF,
1631 IEEE80211_SMPS_STATIC,
1632 IEEE80211_SMPS_DYNAMIC,
1633
1634 /* keep last */
1635 IEEE80211_SMPS_NUM_MODES,
1636 };
1637
1638 /**
1639 * struct ieee80211_conf - configuration of the device
1640 *
1641 * This struct indicates how the driver shall configure the hardware.
1642 *
1643 * @flags: configuration flags defined above
1644 *
1645 * @listen_interval: listen interval in units of beacon interval
1646 * @ps_dtim_period: The DTIM period of the AP we're connected to, for use
1647 * in power saving. Power saving will not be enabled until a beacon
1648 * has been received and the DTIM period is known.
1649 * @dynamic_ps_timeout: The dynamic powersave timeout (in ms), see the
1650 * powersave documentation below. This variable is valid only when
1651 * the CONF_PS flag is set.
1652 *
1653 * @power_level: requested transmit power (in dBm), backward compatibility
1654 * value only that is set to the minimum of all interfaces
1655 *
1656 * @chandef: the channel definition to tune to
1657 * @radar_enabled: whether radar detection is enabled
1658 *
1659 * @long_frame_max_tx_count: Maximum number of transmissions for a "long" frame
1660 * (a frame not RTS protected), called "dot11LongRetryLimit" in 802.11,
1661 * but actually means the number of transmissions not the number of retries
1662 * @short_frame_max_tx_count: Maximum number of transmissions for a "short"
1663 * frame, called "dot11ShortRetryLimit" in 802.11, but actually means the
1664 * number of transmissions not the number of retries
1665 *
1666 * @smps_mode: spatial multiplexing powersave mode; note that
1667 * %IEEE80211_SMPS_STATIC is used when the device is not
1668 * configured for an HT channel.
1669 * Note that this is only valid if channel contexts are not used,
1670 * otherwise each channel context has the number of chains listed.
1671 */
1672 struct ieee80211_conf {
1673 u32 flags;
1674 int power_level, dynamic_ps_timeout;
1675
1676 u16 listen_interval;
1677 u8 ps_dtim_period;
1678
1679 u8 long_frame_max_tx_count, short_frame_max_tx_count;
1680
1681 struct cfg80211_chan_def chandef;
1682 bool radar_enabled;
1683 enum ieee80211_smps_mode smps_mode;
1684
1685 ANDROID_KABI_RESERVE(1);
1686 };
1687
1688 /**
1689 * struct ieee80211_channel_switch - holds the channel switch data
1690 *
1691 * The information provided in this structure is required for channel switch
1692 * operation.
1693 *
1694 * @timestamp: value in microseconds of the 64-bit Time Synchronization
1695 * Function (TSF) timer when the frame containing the channel switch
1696 * announcement was received. This is simply the rx.mactime parameter
1697 * the driver passed into mac80211.
1698 * @device_timestamp: arbitrary timestamp for the device, this is the
1699 * rx.device_timestamp parameter the driver passed to mac80211.
1700 * @block_tx: Indicates whether transmission must be blocked before the
1701 * scheduled channel switch, as indicated by the AP.
1702 * @chandef: the new channel to switch to
1703 * @count: the number of TBTT's until the channel switch event
1704 * @delay: maximum delay between the time the AP transmitted the last beacon in
1705 * current channel and the expected time of the first beacon in the new
1706 * channel, expressed in TU.
1707 */
1708 struct ieee80211_channel_switch {
1709 u64 timestamp;
1710 u32 device_timestamp;
1711 bool block_tx;
1712 struct cfg80211_chan_def chandef;
1713 u8 count;
1714 u32 delay;
1715 };
1716
1717 /**
1718 * enum ieee80211_vif_flags - virtual interface flags
1719 *
1720 * @IEEE80211_VIF_BEACON_FILTER: the device performs beacon filtering
1721 * on this virtual interface to avoid unnecessary CPU wakeups
1722 * @IEEE80211_VIF_SUPPORTS_CQM_RSSI: the device can do connection quality
1723 * monitoring on this virtual interface -- i.e. it can monitor
1724 * connection quality related parameters, such as the RSSI level and
1725 * provide notifications if configured trigger levels are reached.
1726 * @IEEE80211_VIF_SUPPORTS_UAPSD: The device can do U-APSD for this
1727 * interface. This flag should be set during interface addition,
1728 * but may be set/cleared as late as authentication to an AP. It is
1729 * only valid for managed/station mode interfaces.
1730 * @IEEE80211_VIF_GET_NOA_UPDATE: request to handle NOA attributes
1731 * and send P2P_PS notification to the driver if NOA changed, even
1732 * this is not pure P2P vif.
1733 */
1734 enum ieee80211_vif_flags {
1735 IEEE80211_VIF_BEACON_FILTER = BIT(0),
1736 IEEE80211_VIF_SUPPORTS_CQM_RSSI = BIT(1),
1737 IEEE80211_VIF_SUPPORTS_UAPSD = BIT(2),
1738 IEEE80211_VIF_GET_NOA_UPDATE = BIT(3),
1739 };
1740
1741
1742 /**
1743 * enum ieee80211_offload_flags - virtual interface offload flags
1744 *
1745 * @IEEE80211_OFFLOAD_ENCAP_ENABLED: tx encapsulation offload is enabled
1746 * The driver supports sending frames passed as 802.3 frames by mac80211.
1747 * It must also support sending 802.11 packets for the same interface.
1748 * @IEEE80211_OFFLOAD_ENCAP_4ADDR: support 4-address mode encapsulation offload
1749 * @IEEE80211_OFFLOAD_DECAP_ENABLED: rx encapsulation offload is enabled
1750 * The driver supports passing received 802.11 frames as 802.3 frames to
1751 * mac80211.
1752 */
1753
1754 enum ieee80211_offload_flags {
1755 IEEE80211_OFFLOAD_ENCAP_ENABLED = BIT(0),
1756 IEEE80211_OFFLOAD_ENCAP_4ADDR = BIT(1),
1757 IEEE80211_OFFLOAD_DECAP_ENABLED = BIT(2),
1758 };
1759
1760 /**
1761 * struct ieee80211_vif_cfg - interface configuration
1762 * @assoc: association status
1763 * @ibss_joined: indicates whether this station is part of an IBSS or not
1764 * @ibss_creator: indicates if a new IBSS network is being created
1765 * @ps: power-save mode (STA only). This flag is NOT affected by
1766 * offchannel/dynamic_ps operations.
1767 * @aid: association ID number, valid only when @assoc is true
1768 * @arp_addr_list: List of IPv4 addresses for hardware ARP filtering. The
1769 * may filter ARP queries targeted for other addresses than listed here.
1770 * The driver must allow ARP queries targeted for all address listed here
1771 * to pass through. An empty list implies no ARP queries need to pass.
1772 * @arp_addr_cnt: Number of addresses currently on the list. Note that this
1773 * may be larger than %IEEE80211_BSS_ARP_ADDR_LIST_LEN (the arp_addr_list
1774 * array size), it's up to the driver what to do in that case.
1775 * @ssid: The SSID of the current vif. Valid in AP and IBSS mode.
1776 * @ssid_len: Length of SSID given in @ssid.
1777 * @s1g: BSS is S1G BSS (affects Association Request format).
1778 * @idle: This interface is idle. There's also a global idle flag in the
1779 * hardware config which may be more appropriate depending on what
1780 * your driver/device needs to do.
1781 * @ap_addr: AP MLD address, or BSSID for non-MLO connections
1782 * (station mode only)
1783 */
1784 struct ieee80211_vif_cfg {
1785 /* association related data */
1786 bool assoc, ibss_joined;
1787 bool ibss_creator;
1788 bool ps;
1789 u16 aid;
1790
1791 __be32 arp_addr_list[IEEE80211_BSS_ARP_ADDR_LIST_LEN];
1792 int arp_addr_cnt;
1793 u8 ssid[IEEE80211_MAX_SSID_LEN];
1794 size_t ssid_len;
1795 bool s1g;
1796 bool idle;
1797 u8 ap_addr[ETH_ALEN] __aligned(2);
1798 };
1799
1800 /**
1801 * struct ieee80211_vif - per-interface data
1802 *
1803 * Data in this structure is continually present for driver
1804 * use during the life of a virtual interface.
1805 *
1806 * @type: type of this virtual interface
1807 * @cfg: vif configuration, see &struct ieee80211_vif_cfg
1808 * @bss_conf: BSS configuration for this interface, either our own
1809 * or the BSS we're associated to
1810 * @link_conf: in case of MLD, the per-link BSS configuration,
1811 * indexed by link ID
1812 * @valid_links: bitmap of valid links, or 0 for non-MLO.
1813 * @active_links: The bitmap of active links, or 0 for non-MLO.
1814 * The driver shouldn't change this directly, but use the
1815 * API calls meant for that purpose.
1816 * @addr: address of this interface
1817 * @p2p: indicates whether this AP or STA interface is a p2p
1818 * interface, i.e. a GO or p2p-sta respectively
1819 * @driver_flags: flags/capabilities the driver has for this interface,
1820 * these need to be set (or cleared) when the interface is added
1821 * or, if supported by the driver, the interface type is changed
1822 * at runtime, mac80211 will never touch this field
1823 * @offload_flags: hardware offload capabilities/flags for this interface.
1824 * These are initialized by mac80211 before calling .add_interface,
1825 * .change_interface or .update_vif_offload and updated by the driver
1826 * within these ops, based on supported features or runtime change
1827 * restrictions.
1828 * @hw_queue: hardware queue for each AC
1829 * @cab_queue: content-after-beacon (DTIM beacon really) queue, AP mode only
1830 * @debugfs_dir: debugfs dentry, can be used by drivers to create own per
1831 * interface debug files. Note that it will be NULL for the virtual
1832 * monitor interface (if that is requested.)
1833 * @probe_req_reg: probe requests should be reported to mac80211 for this
1834 * interface.
1835 * @rx_mcast_action_reg: multicast Action frames should be reported to mac80211
1836 * for this interface.
1837 * @drv_priv: data area for driver use, will always be aligned to
1838 * sizeof(void \*).
1839 * @txq: the multicast data TX queue (if driver uses the TXQ abstraction)
1840 * @offload_flags: 802.3 -> 802.11 enapsulation offload flags, see
1841 * &enum ieee80211_offload_flags.
1842 * @mbssid_tx_vif: Pointer to the transmitting interface if MBSSID is enabled.
1843 */
1844 struct ieee80211_vif {
1845 enum nl80211_iftype type;
1846 struct ieee80211_vif_cfg cfg;
1847 struct ieee80211_bss_conf bss_conf;
1848 struct ieee80211_bss_conf __rcu *link_conf[IEEE80211_MLD_MAX_NUM_LINKS];
1849 u16 valid_links, active_links;
1850 u8 addr[ETH_ALEN] __aligned(2);
1851 bool p2p;
1852
1853 u8 cab_queue;
1854 u8 hw_queue[IEEE80211_NUM_ACS];
1855
1856 struct ieee80211_txq *txq;
1857
1858 u32 driver_flags;
1859 u32 offload_flags;
1860
1861 #ifdef CONFIG_MAC80211_DEBUGFS
1862 struct dentry *debugfs_dir;
1863 #endif
1864
1865 bool probe_req_reg;
1866 bool rx_mcast_action_reg;
1867
1868 struct ieee80211_vif *mbssid_tx_vif;
1869
1870 ANDROID_KABI_RESERVE(1);
1871
1872 /* must be last */
1873 u8 drv_priv[] __aligned(sizeof(void *));
1874 };
1875
1876 #define for_each_vif_active_link(vif, link, link_id) \
1877 for (link_id = 0; link_id < ARRAY_SIZE((vif)->link_conf); link_id++) \
1878 if ((!(vif)->active_links || \
1879 (vif)->active_links & BIT(link_id)) && \
1880 (link = rcu_dereference((vif)->link_conf[link_id])))
1881
ieee80211_vif_is_mesh(struct ieee80211_vif * vif)1882 static inline bool ieee80211_vif_is_mesh(struct ieee80211_vif *vif)
1883 {
1884 #ifdef CONFIG_MAC80211_MESH
1885 return vif->type == NL80211_IFTYPE_MESH_POINT;
1886 #endif
1887 return false;
1888 }
1889
1890 /**
1891 * wdev_to_ieee80211_vif - return a vif struct from a wdev
1892 * @wdev: the wdev to get the vif for
1893 *
1894 * This can be used by mac80211 drivers with direct cfg80211 APIs
1895 * (like the vendor commands) that get a wdev.
1896 *
1897 * Note that this function may return %NULL if the given wdev isn't
1898 * associated with a vif that the driver knows about (e.g. monitor
1899 * or AP_VLAN interfaces.)
1900 */
1901 struct ieee80211_vif *wdev_to_ieee80211_vif(struct wireless_dev *wdev);
1902
1903 /**
1904 * ieee80211_vif_to_wdev - return a wdev struct from a vif
1905 * @vif: the vif to get the wdev for
1906 *
1907 * This can be used by mac80211 drivers with direct cfg80211 APIs
1908 * (like the vendor commands) that needs to get the wdev for a vif.
1909 * This can also be useful to get the netdev associated to a vif.
1910 */
1911 struct wireless_dev *ieee80211_vif_to_wdev(struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
1912
1913 /**
1914 * lockdep_vif_mutex_held - for lockdep checks on link poiners
1915 * @vif: the interface to check
1916 */
lockdep_vif_mutex_held(struct ieee80211_vif * vif)1917 static inline bool lockdep_vif_mutex_held(struct ieee80211_vif *vif)
1918 {
1919 return lockdep_is_held(&ieee80211_vif_to_wdev(vif)->mtx);
1920 }
1921
1922 #define link_conf_dereference_protected(vif, link_id) \
1923 rcu_dereference_protected((vif)->link_conf[link_id], \
1924 lockdep_vif_mutex_held(vif))
1925
1926 /**
1927 * enum ieee80211_key_flags - key flags
1928 *
1929 * These flags are used for communication about keys between the driver
1930 * and mac80211, with the @flags parameter of &struct ieee80211_key_conf.
1931 *
1932 * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_GENERATE_IV: This flag should be set by the
1933 * driver to indicate that it requires IV generation for this
1934 * particular key. Setting this flag does not necessarily mean that SKBs
1935 * will have sufficient tailroom for ICV or MIC.
1936 * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_GENERATE_MMIC: This flag should be set by
1937 * the driver for a TKIP key if it requires Michael MIC
1938 * generation in software.
1939 * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_PAIRWISE: Set by mac80211, this flag indicates
1940 * that the key is pairwise rather then a shared key.
1941 * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_SW_MGMT_TX: This flag should be set by the driver for a
1942 * CCMP/GCMP key if it requires CCMP/GCMP encryption of management frames
1943 * (MFP) to be done in software.
1944 * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_PUT_IV_SPACE: This flag should be set by the driver
1945 * if space should be prepared for the IV, but the IV
1946 * itself should not be generated. Do not set together with
1947 * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_GENERATE_IV on the same key. Setting this flag does
1948 * not necessarily mean that SKBs will have sufficient tailroom for ICV or
1949 * MIC.
1950 * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_RX_MGMT: This key will be used to decrypt received
1951 * management frames. The flag can help drivers that have a hardware
1952 * crypto implementation that doesn't deal with management frames
1953 * properly by allowing them to not upload the keys to hardware and
1954 * fall back to software crypto. Note that this flag deals only with
1955 * RX, if your crypto engine can't deal with TX you can also set the
1956 * %IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_SW_MGMT_TX flag to encrypt such frames in SW.
1957 * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_GENERATE_IV_MGMT: This flag should be set by the
1958 * driver for a CCMP/GCMP key to indicate that is requires IV generation
1959 * only for management frames (MFP).
1960 * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_RESERVE_TAILROOM: This flag should be set by the
1961 * driver for a key to indicate that sufficient tailroom must always
1962 * be reserved for ICV or MIC, even when HW encryption is enabled.
1963 * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_PUT_MIC_SPACE: This flag should be set by the driver for
1964 * a TKIP key if it only requires MIC space. Do not set together with
1965 * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_GENERATE_MMIC on the same key.
1966 * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_NO_AUTO_TX: Key needs explicit Tx activation.
1967 * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_GENERATE_MMIE: This flag should be set by the driver
1968 * for a AES_CMAC key to indicate that it requires sequence number
1969 * generation only
1970 */
1971 enum ieee80211_key_flags {
1972 IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_GENERATE_IV_MGMT = BIT(0),
1973 IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_GENERATE_IV = BIT(1),
1974 IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_GENERATE_MMIC = BIT(2),
1975 IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_PAIRWISE = BIT(3),
1976 IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_SW_MGMT_TX = BIT(4),
1977 IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_PUT_IV_SPACE = BIT(5),
1978 IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_RX_MGMT = BIT(6),
1979 IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_RESERVE_TAILROOM = BIT(7),
1980 IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_PUT_MIC_SPACE = BIT(8),
1981 IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_NO_AUTO_TX = BIT(9),
1982 IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_GENERATE_MMIE = BIT(10),
1983 };
1984
1985 /**
1986 * struct ieee80211_key_conf - key information
1987 *
1988 * This key information is given by mac80211 to the driver by
1989 * the set_key() callback in &struct ieee80211_ops.
1990 *
1991 * @hw_key_idx: To be set by the driver, this is the key index the driver
1992 * wants to be given when a frame is transmitted and needs to be
1993 * encrypted in hardware.
1994 * @cipher: The key's cipher suite selector.
1995 * @tx_pn: PN used for TX keys, may be used by the driver as well if it
1996 * needs to do software PN assignment by itself (e.g. due to TSO)
1997 * @flags: key flags, see &enum ieee80211_key_flags.
1998 * @keyidx: the key index (0-3)
1999 * @keylen: key material length
2000 * @key: key material. For ALG_TKIP the key is encoded as a 256-bit (32 byte)
2001 * data block:
2002 * - Temporal Encryption Key (128 bits)
2003 * - Temporal Authenticator Tx MIC Key (64 bits)
2004 * - Temporal Authenticator Rx MIC Key (64 bits)
2005 * @icv_len: The ICV length for this key type
2006 * @iv_len: The IV length for this key type
2007 * @link_id: the link ID for MLO, or -1 for non-MLO or pairwise keys
2008 */
2009 struct ieee80211_key_conf {
2010 atomic64_t tx_pn;
2011 u32 cipher;
2012 u8 icv_len;
2013 u8 iv_len;
2014 u8 hw_key_idx;
2015 s8 keyidx;
2016 u16 flags;
2017 s8 link_id;
2018 u8 keylen;
2019 u8 key[];
2020 };
2021
2022 #define IEEE80211_MAX_PN_LEN 16
2023
2024 #define TKIP_PN_TO_IV16(pn) ((u16)(pn & 0xffff))
2025 #define TKIP_PN_TO_IV32(pn) ((u32)((pn >> 16) & 0xffffffff))
2026
2027 /**
2028 * struct ieee80211_key_seq - key sequence counter
2029 *
2030 * @tkip: TKIP data, containing IV32 and IV16 in host byte order
2031 * @ccmp: PN data, most significant byte first (big endian,
2032 * reverse order than in packet)
2033 * @aes_cmac: PN data, most significant byte first (big endian,
2034 * reverse order than in packet)
2035 * @aes_gmac: PN data, most significant byte first (big endian,
2036 * reverse order than in packet)
2037 * @gcmp: PN data, most significant byte first (big endian,
2038 * reverse order than in packet)
2039 * @hw: data for HW-only (e.g. cipher scheme) keys
2040 */
2041 struct ieee80211_key_seq {
2042 union {
2043 struct {
2044 u32 iv32;
2045 u16 iv16;
2046 } tkip;
2047 struct {
2048 u8 pn[6];
2049 } ccmp;
2050 struct {
2051 u8 pn[6];
2052 } aes_cmac;
2053 struct {
2054 u8 pn[6];
2055 } aes_gmac;
2056 struct {
2057 u8 pn[6];
2058 } gcmp;
2059 struct {
2060 u8 seq[IEEE80211_MAX_PN_LEN];
2061 u8 seq_len;
2062 } hw;
2063 };
2064 };
2065
2066 /**
2067 * enum set_key_cmd - key command
2068 *
2069 * Used with the set_key() callback in &struct ieee80211_ops, this
2070 * indicates whether a key is being removed or added.
2071 *
2072 * @SET_KEY: a key is set
2073 * @DISABLE_KEY: a key must be disabled
2074 */
2075 enum set_key_cmd {
2076 SET_KEY, DISABLE_KEY,
2077 };
2078
2079 /**
2080 * enum ieee80211_sta_state - station state
2081 *
2082 * @IEEE80211_STA_NOTEXIST: station doesn't exist at all,
2083 * this is a special state for add/remove transitions
2084 * @IEEE80211_STA_NONE: station exists without special state
2085 * @IEEE80211_STA_AUTH: station is authenticated
2086 * @IEEE80211_STA_ASSOC: station is associated
2087 * @IEEE80211_STA_AUTHORIZED: station is authorized (802.1X)
2088 */
2089 enum ieee80211_sta_state {
2090 /* NOTE: These need to be ordered correctly! */
2091 IEEE80211_STA_NOTEXIST,
2092 IEEE80211_STA_NONE,
2093 IEEE80211_STA_AUTH,
2094 IEEE80211_STA_ASSOC,
2095 IEEE80211_STA_AUTHORIZED,
2096 };
2097
2098 /**
2099 * enum ieee80211_sta_rx_bandwidth - station RX bandwidth
2100 * @IEEE80211_STA_RX_BW_20: station can only receive 20 MHz
2101 * @IEEE80211_STA_RX_BW_40: station can receive up to 40 MHz
2102 * @IEEE80211_STA_RX_BW_80: station can receive up to 80 MHz
2103 * @IEEE80211_STA_RX_BW_160: station can receive up to 160 MHz
2104 * (including 80+80 MHz)
2105 * @IEEE80211_STA_RX_BW_320: station can receive up to 320 MHz
2106 *
2107 * Implementation note: 20 must be zero to be initialized
2108 * correctly, the values must be sorted.
2109 */
2110 enum ieee80211_sta_rx_bandwidth {
2111 IEEE80211_STA_RX_BW_20 = 0,
2112 IEEE80211_STA_RX_BW_40,
2113 IEEE80211_STA_RX_BW_80,
2114 IEEE80211_STA_RX_BW_160,
2115 IEEE80211_STA_RX_BW_320,
2116 };
2117
2118 /**
2119 * struct ieee80211_sta_rates - station rate selection table
2120 *
2121 * @rcu_head: RCU head used for freeing the table on update
2122 * @rate: transmit rates/flags to be used by default.
2123 * Overriding entries per-packet is possible by using cb tx control.
2124 */
2125 struct ieee80211_sta_rates {
2126 struct rcu_head rcu_head;
2127 struct {
2128 s8 idx;
2129 u8 count;
2130 u8 count_cts;
2131 u8 count_rts;
2132 u16 flags;
2133 } rate[IEEE80211_TX_RATE_TABLE_SIZE];
2134 };
2135
2136 /**
2137 * struct ieee80211_sta_txpwr - station txpower configuration
2138 *
2139 * Used to configure txpower for station.
2140 *
2141 * @power: indicates the tx power, in dBm, to be used when sending data frames
2142 * to the STA.
2143 * @type: In particular if TPC %type is NL80211_TX_POWER_LIMITED then tx power
2144 * will be less than or equal to specified from userspace, whereas if TPC
2145 * %type is NL80211_TX_POWER_AUTOMATIC then it indicates default tx power.
2146 * NL80211_TX_POWER_FIXED is not a valid configuration option for
2147 * per peer TPC.
2148 */
2149 struct ieee80211_sta_txpwr {
2150 s16 power;
2151 enum nl80211_tx_power_setting type;
2152 };
2153
2154 /**
2155 * struct ieee80211_sta_aggregates - info that is aggregated from active links
2156 *
2157 * Used for any per-link data that needs to be aggregated and updated in the
2158 * main &struct ieee80211_sta when updated or the active links change.
2159 *
2160 * @max_amsdu_len: indicates the maximal length of an A-MSDU in bytes.
2161 * This field is always valid for packets with a VHT preamble.
2162 * For packets with a HT preamble, additional limits apply:
2163 *
2164 * * If the skb is transmitted as part of a BA agreement, the
2165 * A-MSDU maximal size is min(max_amsdu_len, 4065) bytes.
2166 * * If the skb is not part of a BA agreement, the A-MSDU maximal
2167 * size is min(max_amsdu_len, 7935) bytes.
2168 *
2169 * Both additional HT limits must be enforced by the low level
2170 * driver. This is defined by the spec (IEEE 802.11-2012 section
2171 * 8.3.2.2 NOTE 2).
2172 * @max_rc_amsdu_len: Maximum A-MSDU size in bytes recommended by rate control.
2173 * @max_tid_amsdu_len: Maximum A-MSDU size in bytes for this TID
2174 */
2175 struct ieee80211_sta_aggregates {
2176 u16 max_amsdu_len;
2177
2178 u16 max_rc_amsdu_len;
2179 u16 max_tid_amsdu_len[IEEE80211_NUM_TIDS];
2180 };
2181
2182 /**
2183 * struct ieee80211_link_sta - station Link specific info
2184 * All link specific info for a STA link for a non MLD STA(single)
2185 * or a MLD STA(multiple entries) are stored here.
2186 *
2187 * @addr: MAC address of the Link STA. For non-MLO STA this is same as the addr
2188 * in ieee80211_sta. For MLO Link STA this addr can be same or different
2189 * from addr in ieee80211_sta (representing MLD STA addr)
2190 * @link_id: the link ID for this link STA (0 for deflink)
2191 * @smps_mode: current SMPS mode (off, static or dynamic)
2192 * @supp_rates: Bitmap of supported rates
2193 * @ht_cap: HT capabilities of this STA; restricted to our own capabilities
2194 * @vht_cap: VHT capabilities of this STA; restricted to our own capabilities
2195 * @he_cap: HE capabilities of this STA
2196 * @he_6ghz_capa: on 6 GHz, holds the HE 6 GHz band capabilities
2197 * @eht_cap: EHT capabilities of this STA
2198 * @bandwidth: current bandwidth the station can receive with
2199 * @rx_nss: in HT/VHT, the maximum number of spatial streams the
2200 * station can receive at the moment, changed by operating mode
2201 * notifications and capabilities. The value is only valid after
2202 * the station moves to associated state.
2203 * @txpwr: the station tx power configuration
2204 *
2205 */
2206 struct ieee80211_link_sta {
2207 u8 addr[ETH_ALEN];
2208 u8 link_id;
2209 enum ieee80211_smps_mode smps_mode;
2210
2211 u32 supp_rates[NUM_NL80211_BANDS];
2212 struct ieee80211_sta_ht_cap ht_cap;
2213 struct ieee80211_sta_vht_cap vht_cap;
2214 struct ieee80211_sta_he_cap he_cap;
2215 struct ieee80211_he_6ghz_capa he_6ghz_capa;
2216 struct ieee80211_sta_eht_cap eht_cap;
2217
2218 struct ieee80211_sta_aggregates agg;
2219
2220 u8 rx_nss;
2221 enum ieee80211_sta_rx_bandwidth bandwidth;
2222 struct ieee80211_sta_txpwr txpwr;
2223 };
2224
2225 /**
2226 * struct ieee80211_sta - station table entry
2227 *
2228 * A station table entry represents a station we are possibly
2229 * communicating with. Since stations are RCU-managed in
2230 * mac80211, any ieee80211_sta pointer you get access to must
2231 * either be protected by rcu_read_lock() explicitly or implicitly,
2232 * or you must take good care to not use such a pointer after a
2233 * call to your sta_remove callback that removed it.
2234 * This also represents the MLD STA in case of MLO association
2235 * and holds pointers to various link STA's
2236 *
2237 * @addr: MAC address
2238 * @aid: AID we assigned to the station if we're an AP
2239 * @max_rx_aggregation_subframes: maximal amount of frames in a single AMPDU
2240 * that this station is allowed to transmit to us.
2241 * Can be modified by driver.
2242 * @wme: indicates whether the STA supports QoS/WME (if local devices does,
2243 * otherwise always false)
2244 * @drv_priv: data area for driver use, will always be aligned to
2245 * sizeof(void \*), size is determined in hw information.
2246 * @uapsd_queues: bitmap of queues configured for uapsd. Only valid
2247 * if wme is supported. The bits order is like in
2248 * IEEE80211_WMM_IE_STA_QOSINFO_AC_*.
2249 * @max_sp: max Service Period. Only valid if wme is supported.
2250 * @rates: rate control selection table
2251 * @tdls: indicates whether the STA is a TDLS peer
2252 * @tdls_initiator: indicates the STA is an initiator of the TDLS link. Only
2253 * valid if the STA is a TDLS peer in the first place.
2254 * @mfp: indicates whether the STA uses management frame protection or not.
2255 * @mlo: indicates whether the STA is MLO station.
2256 * @max_amsdu_subframes: indicates the maximal number of MSDUs in a single
2257 * A-MSDU. Taken from the Extended Capabilities element. 0 means
2258 * unlimited.
2259 * @cur: currently valid data as aggregated from the active links
2260 * For non MLO STA it will point to the deflink data. For MLO STA
2261 * ieee80211_sta_recalc_aggregates() must be called to update it.
2262 * @support_p2p_ps: indicates whether the STA supports P2P PS mechanism or not.
2263 * @txq: per-TID data TX queues (if driver uses the TXQ abstraction); note that
2264 * the last entry (%IEEE80211_NUM_TIDS) is used for non-data frames
2265 * @deflink: This holds the default link STA information, for non MLO STA all link
2266 * specific STA information is accessed through @deflink or through
2267 * link[0] which points to address of @deflink. For MLO Link STA
2268 * the first added link STA will point to deflink.
2269 * @link: reference to Link Sta entries. For Non MLO STA, except 1st link,
2270 * i.e link[0] all links would be assigned to NULL by default and
2271 * would access link information via @deflink or link[0]. For MLO
2272 * STA, first link STA being added will point its link pointer to
2273 * @deflink address and remaining would be allocated and the address
2274 * would be assigned to link[link_id] where link_id is the id assigned
2275 * by the AP.
2276 * @valid_links: bitmap of valid links, or 0 for non-MLO
2277 */
2278 struct ieee80211_sta {
2279 u8 addr[ETH_ALEN];
2280 u16 aid;
2281 u16 max_rx_aggregation_subframes;
2282 bool wme;
2283 u8 uapsd_queues;
2284 u8 max_sp;
2285 struct ieee80211_sta_rates __rcu *rates;
2286 bool tdls;
2287 bool tdls_initiator;
2288 bool mfp;
2289 bool mlo;
2290 u8 max_amsdu_subframes;
2291
2292 struct ieee80211_sta_aggregates *cur;
2293
2294 bool support_p2p_ps;
2295
2296 struct ieee80211_txq *txq[IEEE80211_NUM_TIDS + 1];
2297
2298 u16 valid_links;
2299 struct ieee80211_link_sta deflink;
2300 struct ieee80211_link_sta __rcu *link[IEEE80211_MLD_MAX_NUM_LINKS];
2301
2302 ANDROID_KABI_RESERVE(1);
2303
2304 /* must be last */
2305 u8 drv_priv[] __aligned(sizeof(void *));
2306 };
2307
2308 #ifdef CONFIG_LOCKDEP
2309 bool lockdep_sta_mutex_held(struct ieee80211_sta *pubsta);
2310 #else
lockdep_sta_mutex_held(struct ieee80211_sta * pubsta)2311 static inline bool lockdep_sta_mutex_held(struct ieee80211_sta *pubsta)
2312 {
2313 return true;
2314 }
2315 #endif
2316
2317 #define link_sta_dereference_protected(sta, link_id) \
2318 rcu_dereference_protected((sta)->link[link_id], \
2319 lockdep_sta_mutex_held(sta))
2320
2321 #define for_each_sta_active_link(vif, sta, link_sta, link_id) \
2322 for (link_id = 0; link_id < ARRAY_SIZE((sta)->link); link_id++) \
2323 if ((!(vif)->active_links || \
2324 (vif)->active_links & BIT(link_id)) && \
2325 ((link_sta) = link_sta_dereference_protected(sta, link_id)))
2326
2327 /**
2328 * enum sta_notify_cmd - sta notify command
2329 *
2330 * Used with the sta_notify() callback in &struct ieee80211_ops, this
2331 * indicates if an associated station made a power state transition.
2332 *
2333 * @STA_NOTIFY_SLEEP: a station is now sleeping
2334 * @STA_NOTIFY_AWAKE: a sleeping station woke up
2335 */
2336 enum sta_notify_cmd {
2337 STA_NOTIFY_SLEEP, STA_NOTIFY_AWAKE,
2338 };
2339
2340 /**
2341 * struct ieee80211_tx_control - TX control data
2342 *
2343 * @sta: station table entry, this sta pointer may be NULL and
2344 * it is not allowed to copy the pointer, due to RCU.
2345 */
2346 struct ieee80211_tx_control {
2347 struct ieee80211_sta *sta;
2348 };
2349
2350 /**
2351 * struct ieee80211_txq - Software intermediate tx queue
2352 *
2353 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
2354 * @sta: station table entry, %NULL for per-vif queue
2355 * @tid: the TID for this queue (unused for per-vif queue),
2356 * %IEEE80211_NUM_TIDS for non-data (if enabled)
2357 * @ac: the AC for this queue
2358 * @drv_priv: driver private area, sized by hw->txq_data_size
2359 *
2360 * The driver can obtain packets from this queue by calling
2361 * ieee80211_tx_dequeue().
2362 */
2363 struct ieee80211_txq {
2364 struct ieee80211_vif *vif;
2365 struct ieee80211_sta *sta;
2366 u8 tid;
2367 u8 ac;
2368
2369 /* must be last */
2370 u8 drv_priv[] __aligned(sizeof(void *));
2371 };
2372
2373 /**
2374 * enum ieee80211_hw_flags - hardware flags
2375 *
2376 * These flags are used to indicate hardware capabilities to
2377 * the stack. Generally, flags here should have their meaning
2378 * done in a way that the simplest hardware doesn't need setting
2379 * any particular flags. There are some exceptions to this rule,
2380 * however, so you are advised to review these flags carefully.
2381 *
2382 * @IEEE80211_HW_HAS_RATE_CONTROL:
2383 * The hardware or firmware includes rate control, and cannot be
2384 * controlled by the stack. As such, no rate control algorithm
2385 * should be instantiated, and the TX rate reported to userspace
2386 * will be taken from the TX status instead of the rate control
2387 * algorithm.
2388 * Note that this requires that the driver implement a number of
2389 * callbacks so it has the correct information, it needs to have
2390 * the @set_rts_threshold callback and must look at the BSS config
2391 * @use_cts_prot for G/N protection, @use_short_slot for slot
2392 * timing in 2.4 GHz and @use_short_preamble for preambles for
2393 * CCK frames.
2394 *
2395 * @IEEE80211_HW_RX_INCLUDES_FCS:
2396 * Indicates that received frames passed to the stack include
2397 * the FCS at the end.
2398 *
2399 * @IEEE80211_HW_HOST_BROADCAST_PS_BUFFERING:
2400 * Some wireless LAN chipsets buffer broadcast/multicast frames
2401 * for power saving stations in the hardware/firmware and others
2402 * rely on the host system for such buffering. This option is used
2403 * to configure the IEEE 802.11 upper layer to buffer broadcast and
2404 * multicast frames when there are power saving stations so that
2405 * the driver can fetch them with ieee80211_get_buffered_bc().
2406 *
2407 * @IEEE80211_HW_SIGNAL_UNSPEC:
2408 * Hardware can provide signal values but we don't know its units. We
2409 * expect values between 0 and @max_signal.
2410 * If possible please provide dB or dBm instead.
2411 *
2412 * @IEEE80211_HW_SIGNAL_DBM:
2413 * Hardware gives signal values in dBm, decibel difference from
2414 * one milliwatt. This is the preferred method since it is standardized
2415 * between different devices. @max_signal does not need to be set.
2416 *
2417 * @IEEE80211_HW_SPECTRUM_MGMT:
2418 * Hardware supports spectrum management defined in 802.11h
2419 * Measurement, Channel Switch, Quieting, TPC
2420 *
2421 * @IEEE80211_HW_AMPDU_AGGREGATION:
2422 * Hardware supports 11n A-MPDU aggregation.
2423 *
2424 * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_PS:
2425 * Hardware has power save support (i.e. can go to sleep).
2426 *
2427 * @IEEE80211_HW_PS_NULLFUNC_STACK:
2428 * Hardware requires nullfunc frame handling in stack, implies
2429 * stack support for dynamic PS.
2430 *
2431 * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_DYNAMIC_PS:
2432 * Hardware has support for dynamic PS.
2433 *
2434 * @IEEE80211_HW_MFP_CAPABLE:
2435 * Hardware supports management frame protection (MFP, IEEE 802.11w).
2436 *
2437 * @IEEE80211_HW_REPORTS_TX_ACK_STATUS:
2438 * Hardware can provide ack status reports of Tx frames to
2439 * the stack.
2440 *
2441 * @IEEE80211_HW_CONNECTION_MONITOR:
2442 * The hardware performs its own connection monitoring, including
2443 * periodic keep-alives to the AP and probing the AP on beacon loss.
2444 *
2445 * @IEEE80211_HW_NEED_DTIM_BEFORE_ASSOC:
2446 * This device needs to get data from beacon before association (i.e.
2447 * dtim_period).
2448 *
2449 * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_PER_STA_GTK: The device's crypto engine supports
2450 * per-station GTKs as used by IBSS RSN or during fast transition. If
2451 * the device doesn't support per-station GTKs, but can be asked not
2452 * to decrypt group addressed frames, then IBSS RSN support is still
2453 * possible but software crypto will be used. Advertise the wiphy flag
2454 * only in that case.
2455 *
2456 * @IEEE80211_HW_AP_LINK_PS: When operating in AP mode the device
2457 * autonomously manages the PS status of connected stations. When
2458 * this flag is set mac80211 will not trigger PS mode for connected
2459 * stations based on the PM bit of incoming frames.
2460 * Use ieee80211_start_ps()/ieee8021_end_ps() to manually configure
2461 * the PS mode of connected stations.
2462 *
2463 * @IEEE80211_HW_TX_AMPDU_SETUP_IN_HW: The device handles TX A-MPDU session
2464 * setup strictly in HW. mac80211 should not attempt to do this in
2465 * software.
2466 *
2467 * @IEEE80211_HW_WANT_MONITOR_VIF: The driver would like to be informed of
2468 * a virtual monitor interface when monitor interfaces are the only
2469 * active interfaces.
2470 *
2471 * @IEEE80211_HW_NO_AUTO_VIF: The driver would like for no wlanX to
2472 * be created. It is expected user-space will create vifs as
2473 * desired (and thus have them named as desired).
2474 *
2475 * @IEEE80211_HW_SW_CRYPTO_CONTROL: The driver wants to control which of the
2476 * crypto algorithms can be done in software - so don't automatically
2477 * try to fall back to it if hardware crypto fails, but do so only if
2478 * the driver returns 1. This also forces the driver to advertise its
2479 * supported cipher suites.
2480 *
2481 * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORT_FAST_XMIT: The driver/hardware supports fast-xmit,
2482 * this currently requires only the ability to calculate the duration
2483 * for frames.
2484 *
2485 * @IEEE80211_HW_QUEUE_CONTROL: The driver wants to control per-interface
2486 * queue mapping in order to use different queues (not just one per AC)
2487 * for different virtual interfaces. See the doc section on HW queue
2488 * control for more details.
2489 *
2490 * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_RC_TABLE: The driver supports using a rate
2491 * selection table provided by the rate control algorithm.
2492 *
2493 * @IEEE80211_HW_P2P_DEV_ADDR_FOR_INTF: Use the P2P Device address for any
2494 * P2P Interface. This will be honoured even if more than one interface
2495 * is supported.
2496 *
2497 * @IEEE80211_HW_TIMING_BEACON_ONLY: Use sync timing from beacon frames
2498 * only, to allow getting TBTT of a DTIM beacon.
2499 *
2500 * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_HT_CCK_RATES: Hardware supports mixing HT/CCK rates
2501 * and can cope with CCK rates in an aggregation session (e.g. by not
2502 * using aggregation for such frames.)
2503 *
2504 * @IEEE80211_HW_CHANCTX_STA_CSA: Support 802.11h based channel-switch (CSA)
2505 * for a single active channel while using channel contexts. When support
2506 * is not enabled the default action is to disconnect when getting the
2507 * CSA frame.
2508 *
2509 * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_CLONED_SKBS: The driver will never modify the payload
2510 * or tailroom of TX skbs without copying them first.
2511 *
2512 * @IEEE80211_HW_SINGLE_SCAN_ON_ALL_BANDS: The HW supports scanning on all bands
2513 * in one command, mac80211 doesn't have to run separate scans per band.
2514 *
2515 * @IEEE80211_HW_TDLS_WIDER_BW: The device/driver supports wider bandwidth
2516 * than then BSS bandwidth for a TDLS link on the base channel.
2517 *
2518 * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_AMSDU_IN_AMPDU: The driver supports receiving A-MSDUs
2519 * within A-MPDU.
2520 *
2521 * @IEEE80211_HW_BEACON_TX_STATUS: The device/driver provides TX status
2522 * for sent beacons.
2523 *
2524 * @IEEE80211_HW_NEEDS_UNIQUE_STA_ADDR: Hardware (or driver) requires that each
2525 * station has a unique address, i.e. each station entry can be identified
2526 * by just its MAC address; this prevents, for example, the same station
2527 * from connecting to two virtual AP interfaces at the same time.
2528 *
2529 * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_REORDERING_BUFFER: Hardware (or driver) manages the
2530 * reordering buffer internally, guaranteeing mac80211 receives frames in
2531 * order and does not need to manage its own reorder buffer or BA session
2532 * timeout.
2533 *
2534 * @IEEE80211_HW_USES_RSS: The device uses RSS and thus requires parallel RX,
2535 * which implies using per-CPU station statistics.
2536 *
2537 * @IEEE80211_HW_TX_AMSDU: Hardware (or driver) supports software aggregated
2538 * A-MSDU frames. Requires software tx queueing and fast-xmit support.
2539 * When not using minstrel/minstrel_ht rate control, the driver must
2540 * limit the maximum A-MSDU size based on the current tx rate by setting
2541 * max_rc_amsdu_len in struct ieee80211_sta.
2542 *
2543 * @IEEE80211_HW_TX_FRAG_LIST: Hardware (or driver) supports sending frag_list
2544 * skbs, needed for zero-copy software A-MSDU.
2545 *
2546 * @IEEE80211_HW_REPORTS_LOW_ACK: The driver (or firmware) reports low ack event
2547 * by ieee80211_report_low_ack() based on its own algorithm. For such
2548 * drivers, mac80211 packet loss mechanism will not be triggered and driver
2549 * is completely depending on firmware event for station kickout.
2550 *
2551 * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_TX_FRAG: Hardware does fragmentation by itself.
2552 * The stack will not do fragmentation.
2553 * The callback for @set_frag_threshold should be set as well.
2554 *
2555 * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_TDLS_BUFFER_STA: Hardware supports buffer STA on
2556 * TDLS links.
2557 *
2558 * @IEEE80211_HW_DEAUTH_NEED_MGD_TX_PREP: The driver requires the
2559 * mgd_prepare_tx() callback to be called before transmission of a
2560 * deauthentication frame in case the association was completed but no
2561 * beacon was heard. This is required in multi-channel scenarios, where the
2562 * virtual interface might not be given air time for the transmission of
2563 * the frame, as it is not synced with the AP/P2P GO yet, and thus the
2564 * deauthentication frame might not be transmitted.
2565 *
2566 * @IEEE80211_HW_DOESNT_SUPPORT_QOS_NDP: The driver (or firmware) doesn't
2567 * support QoS NDP for AP probing - that's most likely a driver bug.
2568 *
2569 * @IEEE80211_HW_BUFF_MMPDU_TXQ: use the TXQ for bufferable MMPDUs, this of
2570 * course requires the driver to use TXQs to start with.
2571 *
2572 * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_VHT_EXT_NSS_BW: (Hardware) rate control supports VHT
2573 * extended NSS BW (dot11VHTExtendedNSSBWCapable). This flag will be set if
2574 * the selected rate control algorithm sets %RATE_CTRL_CAPA_VHT_EXT_NSS_BW
2575 * but if the rate control is built-in then it must be set by the driver.
2576 * See also the documentation for that flag.
2577 *
2578 * @IEEE80211_HW_STA_MMPDU_TXQ: use the extra non-TID per-station TXQ for all
2579 * MMPDUs on station interfaces. This of course requires the driver to use
2580 * TXQs to start with.
2581 *
2582 * @IEEE80211_HW_TX_STATUS_NO_AMPDU_LEN: Driver does not report accurate A-MPDU
2583 * length in tx status information
2584 *
2585 * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_MULTI_BSSID: Hardware supports multi BSSID
2586 *
2587 * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_ONLY_HE_MULTI_BSSID: Hardware supports multi BSSID
2588 * only for HE APs. Applies if @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_MULTI_BSSID is set.
2589 *
2590 * @IEEE80211_HW_AMPDU_KEYBORDER_SUPPORT: The card and driver is only
2591 * aggregating MPDUs with the same keyid, allowing mac80211 to keep Tx
2592 * A-MPDU sessions active while rekeying with Extended Key ID.
2593 *
2594 * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_TX_ENCAP_OFFLOAD: Hardware supports tx encapsulation
2595 * offload
2596 *
2597 * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_RX_DECAP_OFFLOAD: Hardware supports rx decapsulation
2598 * offload
2599 *
2600 * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_CONC_MON_RX_DECAP: Hardware supports concurrent rx
2601 * decapsulation offload and passing raw 802.11 frames for monitor iface.
2602 * If this is supported, the driver must pass both 802.3 frames for real
2603 * usage and 802.11 frames with %RX_FLAG_ONLY_MONITOR set for monitor to
2604 * the stack.
2605 *
2606 * @IEEE80211_HW_DETECTS_COLOR_COLLISION: HW/driver has support for BSS color
2607 * collision detection and doesn't need it in software.
2608 *
2609 * @IEEE80211_HW_MLO_MCAST_MULTI_LINK_TX: Hardware/driver handles transmitting
2610 * multicast frames on all links, mac80211 should not do that.
2611 *
2612 * @NUM_IEEE80211_HW_FLAGS: number of hardware flags, used for sizing arrays
2613 */
2614 enum ieee80211_hw_flags {
2615 IEEE80211_HW_HAS_RATE_CONTROL,
2616 IEEE80211_HW_RX_INCLUDES_FCS,
2617 IEEE80211_HW_HOST_BROADCAST_PS_BUFFERING,
2618 IEEE80211_HW_SIGNAL_UNSPEC,
2619 IEEE80211_HW_SIGNAL_DBM,
2620 IEEE80211_HW_NEED_DTIM_BEFORE_ASSOC,
2621 IEEE80211_HW_SPECTRUM_MGMT,
2622 IEEE80211_HW_AMPDU_AGGREGATION,
2623 IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_PS,
2624 IEEE80211_HW_PS_NULLFUNC_STACK,
2625 IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_DYNAMIC_PS,
2626 IEEE80211_HW_MFP_CAPABLE,
2627 IEEE80211_HW_WANT_MONITOR_VIF,
2628 IEEE80211_HW_NO_AUTO_VIF,
2629 IEEE80211_HW_SW_CRYPTO_CONTROL,
2630 IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORT_FAST_XMIT,
2631 IEEE80211_HW_REPORTS_TX_ACK_STATUS,
2632 IEEE80211_HW_CONNECTION_MONITOR,
2633 IEEE80211_HW_QUEUE_CONTROL,
2634 IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_PER_STA_GTK,
2635 IEEE80211_HW_AP_LINK_PS,
2636 IEEE80211_HW_TX_AMPDU_SETUP_IN_HW,
2637 IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_RC_TABLE,
2638 IEEE80211_HW_P2P_DEV_ADDR_FOR_INTF,
2639 IEEE80211_HW_TIMING_BEACON_ONLY,
2640 IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_HT_CCK_RATES,
2641 IEEE80211_HW_CHANCTX_STA_CSA,
2642 IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_CLONED_SKBS,
2643 IEEE80211_HW_SINGLE_SCAN_ON_ALL_BANDS,
2644 IEEE80211_HW_TDLS_WIDER_BW,
2645 IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_AMSDU_IN_AMPDU,
2646 IEEE80211_HW_BEACON_TX_STATUS,
2647 IEEE80211_HW_NEEDS_UNIQUE_STA_ADDR,
2648 IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_REORDERING_BUFFER,
2649 IEEE80211_HW_USES_RSS,
2650 IEEE80211_HW_TX_AMSDU,
2651 IEEE80211_HW_TX_FRAG_LIST,
2652 IEEE80211_HW_REPORTS_LOW_ACK,
2653 IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_TX_FRAG,
2654 IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_TDLS_BUFFER_STA,
2655 IEEE80211_HW_DEAUTH_NEED_MGD_TX_PREP,
2656 IEEE80211_HW_DOESNT_SUPPORT_QOS_NDP,
2657 IEEE80211_HW_BUFF_MMPDU_TXQ,
2658 IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_VHT_EXT_NSS_BW,
2659 IEEE80211_HW_STA_MMPDU_TXQ,
2660 IEEE80211_HW_TX_STATUS_NO_AMPDU_LEN,
2661 IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_MULTI_BSSID,
2662 IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_ONLY_HE_MULTI_BSSID,
2663 IEEE80211_HW_AMPDU_KEYBORDER_SUPPORT,
2664 IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_TX_ENCAP_OFFLOAD,
2665 IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_RX_DECAP_OFFLOAD,
2666 IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_CONC_MON_RX_DECAP,
2667 IEEE80211_HW_DETECTS_COLOR_COLLISION,
2668 IEEE80211_HW_MLO_MCAST_MULTI_LINK_TX,
2669
2670 /* keep last, obviously */
2671 NUM_IEEE80211_HW_FLAGS
2672 };
2673
2674 /**
2675 * struct ieee80211_hw - hardware information and state
2676 *
2677 * This structure contains the configuration and hardware
2678 * information for an 802.11 PHY.
2679 *
2680 * @wiphy: This points to the &struct wiphy allocated for this
2681 * 802.11 PHY. You must fill in the @perm_addr and @dev
2682 * members of this structure using SET_IEEE80211_DEV()
2683 * and SET_IEEE80211_PERM_ADDR(). Additionally, all supported
2684 * bands (with channels, bitrates) are registered here.
2685 *
2686 * @conf: &struct ieee80211_conf, device configuration, don't use.
2687 *
2688 * @priv: pointer to private area that was allocated for driver use
2689 * along with this structure.
2690 *
2691 * @flags: hardware flags, see &enum ieee80211_hw_flags.
2692 *
2693 * @extra_tx_headroom: headroom to reserve in each transmit skb
2694 * for use by the driver (e.g. for transmit headers.)
2695 *
2696 * @extra_beacon_tailroom: tailroom to reserve in each beacon tx skb.
2697 * Can be used by drivers to add extra IEs.
2698 *
2699 * @max_signal: Maximum value for signal (rssi) in RX information, used
2700 * only when @IEEE80211_HW_SIGNAL_UNSPEC or @IEEE80211_HW_SIGNAL_DB
2701 *
2702 * @max_listen_interval: max listen interval in units of beacon interval
2703 * that HW supports
2704 *
2705 * @queues: number of available hardware transmit queues for
2706 * data packets. WMM/QoS requires at least four, these
2707 * queues need to have configurable access parameters.
2708 *
2709 * @rate_control_algorithm: rate control algorithm for this hardware.
2710 * If unset (NULL), the default algorithm will be used. Must be
2711 * set before calling ieee80211_register_hw().
2712 *
2713 * @vif_data_size: size (in bytes) of the drv_priv data area
2714 * within &struct ieee80211_vif.
2715 * @sta_data_size: size (in bytes) of the drv_priv data area
2716 * within &struct ieee80211_sta.
2717 * @chanctx_data_size: size (in bytes) of the drv_priv data area
2718 * within &struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf.
2719 * @txq_data_size: size (in bytes) of the drv_priv data area
2720 * within @struct ieee80211_txq.
2721 *
2722 * @max_rates: maximum number of alternate rate retry stages the hw
2723 * can handle.
2724 * @max_report_rates: maximum number of alternate rate retry stages
2725 * the hw can report back.
2726 * @max_rate_tries: maximum number of tries for each stage
2727 *
2728 * @max_rx_aggregation_subframes: maximum buffer size (number of
2729 * sub-frames) to be used for A-MPDU block ack receiver
2730 * aggregation.
2731 * This is only relevant if the device has restrictions on the
2732 * number of subframes, if it relies on mac80211 to do reordering
2733 * it shouldn't be set.
2734 *
2735 * @max_tx_aggregation_subframes: maximum number of subframes in an
2736 * aggregate an HT/HE device will transmit. In HT AddBA we'll
2737 * advertise a constant value of 64 as some older APs crash if
2738 * the window size is smaller (an example is LinkSys WRT120N
2739 * with FW v1.0.07 build 002 Jun 18 2012).
2740 * For AddBA to HE capable peers this value will be used.
2741 *
2742 * @max_tx_fragments: maximum number of tx buffers per (A)-MSDU, sum
2743 * of 1 + skb_shinfo(skb)->nr_frags for each skb in the frag_list.
2744 *
2745 * @offchannel_tx_hw_queue: HW queue ID to use for offchannel TX
2746 * (if %IEEE80211_HW_QUEUE_CONTROL is set)
2747 *
2748 * @radiotap_mcs_details: lists which MCS information can the HW
2749 * reports, by default it is set to _MCS, _GI and _BW but doesn't
2750 * include _FMT. Use %IEEE80211_RADIOTAP_MCS_HAVE_\* values, only
2751 * adding _BW is supported today.
2752 *
2753 * @radiotap_vht_details: lists which VHT MCS information the HW reports,
2754 * the default is _GI | _BANDWIDTH.
2755 * Use the %IEEE80211_RADIOTAP_VHT_KNOWN_\* values.
2756 *
2757 * @radiotap_he: HE radiotap validity flags
2758 *
2759 * @radiotap_timestamp: Information for the radiotap timestamp field; if the
2760 * @units_pos member is set to a non-negative value then the timestamp
2761 * field will be added and populated from the &struct ieee80211_rx_status
2762 * device_timestamp.
2763 * @radiotap_timestamp.units_pos: Must be set to a combination of a
2764 * IEEE80211_RADIOTAP_TIMESTAMP_UNIT_* and a
2765 * IEEE80211_RADIOTAP_TIMESTAMP_SPOS_* value.
2766 * @radiotap_timestamp.accuracy: If non-negative, fills the accuracy in the
2767 * radiotap field and the accuracy known flag will be set.
2768 *
2769 * @netdev_features: netdev features to be set in each netdev created
2770 * from this HW. Note that not all features are usable with mac80211,
2771 * other features will be rejected during HW registration.
2772 *
2773 * @uapsd_queues: This bitmap is included in (re)association frame to indicate
2774 * for each access category if it is uAPSD trigger-enabled and delivery-
2775 * enabled. Use IEEE80211_WMM_IE_STA_QOSINFO_AC_* to set this bitmap.
2776 * Each bit corresponds to different AC. Value '1' in specific bit means
2777 * that corresponding AC is both trigger- and delivery-enabled. '0' means
2778 * neither enabled.
2779 *
2780 * @uapsd_max_sp_len: maximum number of total buffered frames the WMM AP may
2781 * deliver to a WMM STA during any Service Period triggered by the WMM STA.
2782 * Use IEEE80211_WMM_IE_STA_QOSINFO_SP_* for correct values.
2783 *
2784 * @max_nan_de_entries: maximum number of NAN DE functions supported by the
2785 * device.
2786 *
2787 * @tx_sk_pacing_shift: Pacing shift to set on TCP sockets when frames from
2788 * them are encountered. The default should typically not be changed,
2789 * unless the driver has good reasons for needing more buffers.
2790 *
2791 * @weight_multiplier: Driver specific airtime weight multiplier used while
2792 * refilling deficit of each TXQ.
2793 *
2794 * @max_mtu: the max mtu could be set.
2795 *
2796 * @tx_power_levels: a list of power levels supported by the wifi hardware.
2797 * The power levels can be specified either as integer or fractions.
2798 * The power level at idx 0 shall be the maximum positive power level.
2799 *
2800 * @max_txpwr_levels_idx: the maximum valid idx of 'tx_power_levels' list.
2801 */
2802 struct ieee80211_hw {
2803 struct ieee80211_conf conf;
2804 struct wiphy *wiphy;
2805 const char *rate_control_algorithm;
2806 void *priv;
2807 unsigned long flags[BITS_TO_LONGS(NUM_IEEE80211_HW_FLAGS)];
2808 unsigned int extra_tx_headroom;
2809 unsigned int extra_beacon_tailroom;
2810 int vif_data_size;
2811 int sta_data_size;
2812 int chanctx_data_size;
2813 int txq_data_size;
2814 u16 queues;
2815 u16 max_listen_interval;
2816 s8 max_signal;
2817 u8 max_rates;
2818 u8 max_report_rates;
2819 u8 max_rate_tries;
2820 u16 max_rx_aggregation_subframes;
2821 u16 max_tx_aggregation_subframes;
2822 u8 max_tx_fragments;
2823 u8 offchannel_tx_hw_queue;
2824 u8 radiotap_mcs_details;
2825 u16 radiotap_vht_details;
2826 struct {
2827 int units_pos;
2828 s16 accuracy;
2829 } radiotap_timestamp;
2830 netdev_features_t netdev_features;
2831 u8 uapsd_queues;
2832 u8 uapsd_max_sp_len;
2833 u8 max_nan_de_entries;
2834 u8 tx_sk_pacing_shift;
2835 u8 weight_multiplier;
2836 u32 max_mtu;
2837 const s8 *tx_power_levels;
2838 u8 max_txpwr_levels_idx;
2839
2840 ANDROID_KABI_RESERVE(1);
2841 };
2842
_ieee80211_hw_check(struct ieee80211_hw * hw,enum ieee80211_hw_flags flg)2843 static inline bool _ieee80211_hw_check(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
2844 enum ieee80211_hw_flags flg)
2845 {
2846 return test_bit(flg, hw->flags);
2847 }
2848 #define ieee80211_hw_check(hw, flg) _ieee80211_hw_check(hw, IEEE80211_HW_##flg)
2849
_ieee80211_hw_set(struct ieee80211_hw * hw,enum ieee80211_hw_flags flg)2850 static inline void _ieee80211_hw_set(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
2851 enum ieee80211_hw_flags flg)
2852 {
2853 return __set_bit(flg, hw->flags);
2854 }
2855 #define ieee80211_hw_set(hw, flg) _ieee80211_hw_set(hw, IEEE80211_HW_##flg)
2856
2857 /**
2858 * struct ieee80211_scan_request - hw scan request
2859 *
2860 * @ies: pointers different parts of IEs (in req.ie)
2861 * @req: cfg80211 request.
2862 */
2863 struct ieee80211_scan_request {
2864 struct ieee80211_scan_ies ies;
2865
2866 /* Keep last */
2867 struct cfg80211_scan_request req;
2868 };
2869
2870 /**
2871 * struct ieee80211_tdls_ch_sw_params - TDLS channel switch parameters
2872 *
2873 * @sta: peer this TDLS channel-switch request/response came from
2874 * @chandef: channel referenced in a TDLS channel-switch request
2875 * @action_code: see &enum ieee80211_tdls_actioncode
2876 * @status: channel-switch response status
2877 * @timestamp: time at which the frame was received
2878 * @switch_time: switch-timing parameter received in the frame
2879 * @switch_timeout: switch-timing parameter received in the frame
2880 * @tmpl_skb: TDLS switch-channel response template
2881 * @ch_sw_tm_ie: offset of the channel-switch timing IE inside @tmpl_skb
2882 */
2883 struct ieee80211_tdls_ch_sw_params {
2884 struct ieee80211_sta *sta;
2885 struct cfg80211_chan_def *chandef;
2886 u8 action_code;
2887 u32 status;
2888 u32 timestamp;
2889 u16 switch_time;
2890 u16 switch_timeout;
2891 struct sk_buff *tmpl_skb;
2892 u32 ch_sw_tm_ie;
2893 };
2894
2895 /**
2896 * wiphy_to_ieee80211_hw - return a mac80211 driver hw struct from a wiphy
2897 *
2898 * @wiphy: the &struct wiphy which we want to query
2899 *
2900 * mac80211 drivers can use this to get to their respective
2901 * &struct ieee80211_hw. Drivers wishing to get to their own private
2902 * structure can then access it via hw->priv. Note that mac802111 drivers should
2903 * not use wiphy_priv() to try to get their private driver structure as this
2904 * is already used internally by mac80211.
2905 *
2906 * Return: The mac80211 driver hw struct of @wiphy.
2907 */
2908 struct ieee80211_hw *wiphy_to_ieee80211_hw(struct wiphy *wiphy);
2909
2910 /**
2911 * SET_IEEE80211_DEV - set device for 802.11 hardware
2912 *
2913 * @hw: the &struct ieee80211_hw to set the device for
2914 * @dev: the &struct device of this 802.11 device
2915 */
SET_IEEE80211_DEV(struct ieee80211_hw * hw,struct device * dev)2916 static inline void SET_IEEE80211_DEV(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct device *dev)
2917 {
2918 set_wiphy_dev(hw->wiphy, dev);
2919 }
2920
2921 /**
2922 * SET_IEEE80211_PERM_ADDR - set the permanent MAC address for 802.11 hardware
2923 *
2924 * @hw: the &struct ieee80211_hw to set the MAC address for
2925 * @addr: the address to set
2926 */
SET_IEEE80211_PERM_ADDR(struct ieee80211_hw * hw,const u8 * addr)2927 static inline void SET_IEEE80211_PERM_ADDR(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, const u8 *addr)
2928 {
2929 memcpy(hw->wiphy->perm_addr, addr, ETH_ALEN);
2930 }
2931
2932 static inline struct ieee80211_rate *
ieee80211_get_tx_rate(const struct ieee80211_hw * hw,const struct ieee80211_tx_info * c)2933 ieee80211_get_tx_rate(const struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
2934 const struct ieee80211_tx_info *c)
2935 {
2936 if (WARN_ON_ONCE(c->control.rates[0].idx < 0))
2937 return NULL;
2938 return &hw->wiphy->bands[c->band]->bitrates[c->control.rates[0].idx];
2939 }
2940
2941 static inline struct ieee80211_rate *
ieee80211_get_rts_cts_rate(const struct ieee80211_hw * hw,const struct ieee80211_tx_info * c)2942 ieee80211_get_rts_cts_rate(const struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
2943 const struct ieee80211_tx_info *c)
2944 {
2945 if (c->control.rts_cts_rate_idx < 0)
2946 return NULL;
2947 return &hw->wiphy->bands[c->band]->bitrates[c->control.rts_cts_rate_idx];
2948 }
2949
2950 static inline struct ieee80211_rate *
ieee80211_get_alt_retry_rate(const struct ieee80211_hw * hw,const struct ieee80211_tx_info * c,int idx)2951 ieee80211_get_alt_retry_rate(const struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
2952 const struct ieee80211_tx_info *c, int idx)
2953 {
2954 if (c->control.rates[idx + 1].idx < 0)
2955 return NULL;
2956 return &hw->wiphy->bands[c->band]->bitrates[c->control.rates[idx + 1].idx];
2957 }
2958
2959 /**
2960 * ieee80211_free_txskb - free TX skb
2961 * @hw: the hardware
2962 * @skb: the skb
2963 *
2964 * Free a transmit skb. Use this function when some failure
2965 * to transmit happened and thus status cannot be reported.
2966 */
2967 void ieee80211_free_txskb(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct sk_buff *skb);
2968
2969 /**
2970 * DOC: Hardware crypto acceleration
2971 *
2972 * mac80211 is capable of taking advantage of many hardware
2973 * acceleration designs for encryption and decryption operations.
2974 *
2975 * The set_key() callback in the &struct ieee80211_ops for a given
2976 * device is called to enable hardware acceleration of encryption and
2977 * decryption. The callback takes a @sta parameter that will be NULL
2978 * for default keys or keys used for transmission only, or point to
2979 * the station information for the peer for individual keys.
2980 * Multiple transmission keys with the same key index may be used when
2981 * VLANs are configured for an access point.
2982 *
2983 * When transmitting, the TX control data will use the @hw_key_idx
2984 * selected by the driver by modifying the &struct ieee80211_key_conf
2985 * pointed to by the @key parameter to the set_key() function.
2986 *
2987 * The set_key() call for the %SET_KEY command should return 0 if
2988 * the key is now in use, -%EOPNOTSUPP or -%ENOSPC if it couldn't be
2989 * added; if you return 0 then hw_key_idx must be assigned to the
2990 * hardware key index, you are free to use the full u8 range.
2991 *
2992 * Note that in the case that the @IEEE80211_HW_SW_CRYPTO_CONTROL flag is
2993 * set, mac80211 will not automatically fall back to software crypto if
2994 * enabling hardware crypto failed. The set_key() call may also return the
2995 * value 1 to permit this specific key/algorithm to be done in software.
2996 *
2997 * When the cmd is %DISABLE_KEY then it must succeed.
2998 *
2999 * Note that it is permissible to not decrypt a frame even if a key
3000 * for it has been uploaded to hardware, the stack will not make any
3001 * decision based on whether a key has been uploaded or not but rather
3002 * based on the receive flags.
3003 *
3004 * The &struct ieee80211_key_conf structure pointed to by the @key
3005 * parameter is guaranteed to be valid until another call to set_key()
3006 * removes it, but it can only be used as a cookie to differentiate
3007 * keys.
3008 *
3009 * In TKIP some HW need to be provided a phase 1 key, for RX decryption
3010 * acceleration (i.e. iwlwifi). Those drivers should provide update_tkip_key
3011 * handler.
3012 * The update_tkip_key() call updates the driver with the new phase 1 key.
3013 * This happens every time the iv16 wraps around (every 65536 packets). The
3014 * set_key() call will happen only once for each key (unless the AP did
3015 * rekeying), it will not include a valid phase 1 key. The valid phase 1 key is
3016 * provided by update_tkip_key only. The trigger that makes mac80211 call this
3017 * handler is software decryption with wrap around of iv16.
3018 *
3019 * The set_default_unicast_key() call updates the default WEP key index
3020 * configured to the hardware for WEP encryption type. This is required
3021 * for devices that support offload of data packets (e.g. ARP responses).
3022 *
3023 * Mac80211 drivers should set the @NL80211_EXT_FEATURE_CAN_REPLACE_PTK0 flag
3024 * when they are able to replace in-use PTK keys according to the following
3025 * requirements:
3026 * 1) They do not hand over frames decrypted with the old key to mac80211
3027 once the call to set_key() with command %DISABLE_KEY has been completed,
3028 2) either drop or continue to use the old key for any outgoing frames queued
3029 at the time of the key deletion (including re-transmits),
3030 3) never send out a frame queued prior to the set_key() %SET_KEY command
3031 encrypted with the new key when also needing
3032 @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_GENERATE_IV and
3033 4) never send out a frame unencrypted when it should be encrypted.
3034 Mac80211 will not queue any new frames for a deleted key to the driver.
3035 */
3036
3037 /**
3038 * DOC: Powersave support
3039 *
3040 * mac80211 has support for various powersave implementations.
3041 *
3042 * First, it can support hardware that handles all powersaving by itself,
3043 * such hardware should simply set the %IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_PS hardware
3044 * flag. In that case, it will be told about the desired powersave mode
3045 * with the %IEEE80211_CONF_PS flag depending on the association status.
3046 * The hardware must take care of sending nullfunc frames when necessary,
3047 * i.e. when entering and leaving powersave mode. The hardware is required
3048 * to look at the AID in beacons and signal to the AP that it woke up when
3049 * it finds traffic directed to it.
3050 *
3051 * %IEEE80211_CONF_PS flag enabled means that the powersave mode defined in
3052 * IEEE 802.11-2007 section 11.2 is enabled. This is not to be confused
3053 * with hardware wakeup and sleep states. Driver is responsible for waking
3054 * up the hardware before issuing commands to the hardware and putting it
3055 * back to sleep at appropriate times.
3056 *
3057 * When PS is enabled, hardware needs to wakeup for beacons and receive the
3058 * buffered multicast/broadcast frames after the beacon. Also it must be
3059 * possible to send frames and receive the acknowledment frame.
3060 *
3061 * Other hardware designs cannot send nullfunc frames by themselves and also
3062 * need software support for parsing the TIM bitmap. This is also supported
3063 * by mac80211 by combining the %IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_PS and
3064 * %IEEE80211_HW_PS_NULLFUNC_STACK flags. The hardware is of course still
3065 * required to pass up beacons. The hardware is still required to handle
3066 * waking up for multicast traffic; if it cannot the driver must handle that
3067 * as best as it can, mac80211 is too slow to do that.
3068 *
3069 * Dynamic powersave is an extension to normal powersave in which the
3070 * hardware stays awake for a user-specified period of time after sending a
3071 * frame so that reply frames need not be buffered and therefore delayed to
3072 * the next wakeup. It's compromise of getting good enough latency when
3073 * there's data traffic and still saving significantly power in idle
3074 * periods.
3075 *
3076 * Dynamic powersave is simply supported by mac80211 enabling and disabling
3077 * PS based on traffic. Driver needs to only set %IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_PS
3078 * flag and mac80211 will handle everything automatically. Additionally,
3079 * hardware having support for the dynamic PS feature may set the
3080 * %IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_DYNAMIC_PS flag to indicate that it can support
3081 * dynamic PS mode itself. The driver needs to look at the
3082 * @dynamic_ps_timeout hardware configuration value and use it that value
3083 * whenever %IEEE80211_CONF_PS is set. In this case mac80211 will disable
3084 * dynamic PS feature in stack and will just keep %IEEE80211_CONF_PS
3085 * enabled whenever user has enabled powersave.
3086 *
3087 * Driver informs U-APSD client support by enabling
3088 * %IEEE80211_VIF_SUPPORTS_UAPSD flag. The mode is configured through the
3089 * uapsd parameter in conf_tx() operation. Hardware needs to send the QoS
3090 * Nullfunc frames and stay awake until the service period has ended. To
3091 * utilize U-APSD, dynamic powersave is disabled for voip AC and all frames
3092 * from that AC are transmitted with powersave enabled.
3093 *
3094 * Note: U-APSD client mode is not yet supported with
3095 * %IEEE80211_HW_PS_NULLFUNC_STACK.
3096 */
3097
3098 /**
3099 * DOC: Beacon filter support
3100 *
3101 * Some hardware have beacon filter support to reduce host cpu wakeups
3102 * which will reduce system power consumption. It usually works so that
3103 * the firmware creates a checksum of the beacon but omits all constantly
3104 * changing elements (TSF, TIM etc). Whenever the checksum changes the
3105 * beacon is forwarded to the host, otherwise it will be just dropped. That
3106 * way the host will only receive beacons where some relevant information
3107 * (for example ERP protection or WMM settings) have changed.
3108 *
3109 * Beacon filter support is advertised with the %IEEE80211_VIF_BEACON_FILTER
3110 * interface capability. The driver needs to enable beacon filter support
3111 * whenever power save is enabled, that is %IEEE80211_CONF_PS is set. When
3112 * power save is enabled, the stack will not check for beacon loss and the
3113 * driver needs to notify about loss of beacons with ieee80211_beacon_loss().
3114 *
3115 * The time (or number of beacons missed) until the firmware notifies the
3116 * driver of a beacon loss event (which in turn causes the driver to call
3117 * ieee80211_beacon_loss()) should be configurable and will be controlled
3118 * by mac80211 and the roaming algorithm in the future.
3119 *
3120 * Since there may be constantly changing information elements that nothing
3121 * in the software stack cares about, we will, in the future, have mac80211
3122 * tell the driver which information elements are interesting in the sense
3123 * that we want to see changes in them. This will include
3124 *
3125 * - a list of information element IDs
3126 * - a list of OUIs for the vendor information element
3127 *
3128 * Ideally, the hardware would filter out any beacons without changes in the
3129 * requested elements, but if it cannot support that it may, at the expense
3130 * of some efficiency, filter out only a subset. For example, if the device
3131 * doesn't support checking for OUIs it should pass up all changes in all
3132 * vendor information elements.
3133 *
3134 * Note that change, for the sake of simplification, also includes information
3135 * elements appearing or disappearing from the beacon.
3136 *
3137 * Some hardware supports an "ignore list" instead, just make sure nothing
3138 * that was requested is on the ignore list, and include commonly changing
3139 * information element IDs in the ignore list, for example 11 (BSS load) and
3140 * the various vendor-assigned IEs with unknown contents (128, 129, 133-136,
3141 * 149, 150, 155, 156, 173, 176, 178, 179, 219); for forward compatibility
3142 * it could also include some currently unused IDs.
3143 *
3144 *
3145 * In addition to these capabilities, hardware should support notifying the
3146 * host of changes in the beacon RSSI. This is relevant to implement roaming
3147 * when no traffic is flowing (when traffic is flowing we see the RSSI of
3148 * the received data packets). This can consist in notifying the host when
3149 * the RSSI changes significantly or when it drops below or rises above
3150 * configurable thresholds. In the future these thresholds will also be
3151 * configured by mac80211 (which gets them from userspace) to implement
3152 * them as the roaming algorithm requires.
3153 *
3154 * If the hardware cannot implement this, the driver should ask it to
3155 * periodically pass beacon frames to the host so that software can do the
3156 * signal strength threshold checking.
3157 */
3158
3159 /**
3160 * DOC: Spatial multiplexing power save
3161 *
3162 * SMPS (Spatial multiplexing power save) is a mechanism to conserve
3163 * power in an 802.11n implementation. For details on the mechanism
3164 * and rationale, please refer to 802.11 (as amended by 802.11n-2009)
3165 * "11.2.3 SM power save".
3166 *
3167 * The mac80211 implementation is capable of sending action frames
3168 * to update the AP about the station's SMPS mode, and will instruct
3169 * the driver to enter the specific mode. It will also announce the
3170 * requested SMPS mode during the association handshake. Hardware
3171 * support for this feature is required, and can be indicated by
3172 * hardware flags.
3173 *
3174 * The default mode will be "automatic", which nl80211/cfg80211
3175 * defines to be dynamic SMPS in (regular) powersave, and SMPS
3176 * turned off otherwise.
3177 *
3178 * To support this feature, the driver must set the appropriate
3179 * hardware support flags, and handle the SMPS flag to the config()
3180 * operation. It will then with this mechanism be instructed to
3181 * enter the requested SMPS mode while associated to an HT AP.
3182 */
3183
3184 /**
3185 * DOC: Frame filtering
3186 *
3187 * mac80211 requires to see many management frames for proper
3188 * operation, and users may want to see many more frames when
3189 * in monitor mode. However, for best CPU usage and power consumption,
3190 * having as few frames as possible percolate through the stack is
3191 * desirable. Hence, the hardware should filter as much as possible.
3192 *
3193 * To achieve this, mac80211 uses filter flags (see below) to tell
3194 * the driver's configure_filter() function which frames should be
3195 * passed to mac80211 and which should be filtered out.
3196 *
3197 * Before configure_filter() is invoked, the prepare_multicast()
3198 * callback is invoked with the parameters @mc_count and @mc_list
3199 * for the combined multicast address list of all virtual interfaces.
3200 * It's use is optional, and it returns a u64 that is passed to
3201 * configure_filter(). Additionally, configure_filter() has the
3202 * arguments @changed_flags telling which flags were changed and
3203 * @total_flags with the new flag states.
3204 *
3205 * If your device has no multicast address filters your driver will
3206 * need to check both the %FIF_ALLMULTI flag and the @mc_count
3207 * parameter to see whether multicast frames should be accepted
3208 * or dropped.
3209 *
3210 * All unsupported flags in @total_flags must be cleared.
3211 * Hardware does not support a flag if it is incapable of _passing_
3212 * the frame to the stack. Otherwise the driver must ignore
3213 * the flag, but not clear it.
3214 * You must _only_ clear the flag (announce no support for the
3215 * flag to mac80211) if you are not able to pass the packet type
3216 * to the stack (so the hardware always filters it).
3217 * So for example, you should clear @FIF_CONTROL, if your hardware
3218 * always filters control frames. If your hardware always passes
3219 * control frames to the kernel and is incapable of filtering them,
3220 * you do _not_ clear the @FIF_CONTROL flag.
3221 * This rule applies to all other FIF flags as well.
3222 */
3223
3224 /**
3225 * DOC: AP support for powersaving clients
3226 *
3227 * In order to implement AP and P2P GO modes, mac80211 has support for
3228 * client powersaving, both "legacy" PS (PS-Poll/null data) and uAPSD.
3229 * There currently is no support for sAPSD.
3230 *
3231 * There is one assumption that mac80211 makes, namely that a client
3232 * will not poll with PS-Poll and trigger with uAPSD at the same time.
3233 * Both are supported, and both can be used by the same client, but
3234 * they can't be used concurrently by the same client. This simplifies
3235 * the driver code.
3236 *
3237 * The first thing to keep in mind is that there is a flag for complete
3238 * driver implementation: %IEEE80211_HW_AP_LINK_PS. If this flag is set,
3239 * mac80211 expects the driver to handle most of the state machine for
3240 * powersaving clients and will ignore the PM bit in incoming frames.
3241 * Drivers then use ieee80211_sta_ps_transition() to inform mac80211 of
3242 * stations' powersave transitions. In this mode, mac80211 also doesn't
3243 * handle PS-Poll/uAPSD.
3244 *
3245 * In the mode without %IEEE80211_HW_AP_LINK_PS, mac80211 will check the
3246 * PM bit in incoming frames for client powersave transitions. When a
3247 * station goes to sleep, we will stop transmitting to it. There is,
3248 * however, a race condition: a station might go to sleep while there is
3249 * data buffered on hardware queues. If the device has support for this
3250 * it will reject frames, and the driver should give the frames back to
3251 * mac80211 with the %IEEE80211_TX_STAT_TX_FILTERED flag set which will
3252 * cause mac80211 to retry the frame when the station wakes up. The
3253 * driver is also notified of powersave transitions by calling its
3254 * @sta_notify callback.
3255 *
3256 * When the station is asleep, it has three choices: it can wake up,
3257 * it can PS-Poll, or it can possibly start a uAPSD service period.
3258 * Waking up is implemented by simply transmitting all buffered (and
3259 * filtered) frames to the station. This is the easiest case. When
3260 * the station sends a PS-Poll or a uAPSD trigger frame, mac80211
3261 * will inform the driver of this with the @allow_buffered_frames
3262 * callback; this callback is optional. mac80211 will then transmit
3263 * the frames as usual and set the %IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_PS_BUFFER
3264 * on each frame. The last frame in the service period (or the only
3265 * response to a PS-Poll) also has %IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_EOSP set to
3266 * indicate that it ends the service period; as this frame must have
3267 * TX status report it also sets %IEEE80211_TX_CTL_REQ_TX_STATUS.
3268 * When TX status is reported for this frame, the service period is
3269 * marked has having ended and a new one can be started by the peer.
3270 *
3271 * Additionally, non-bufferable MMPDUs can also be transmitted by
3272 * mac80211 with the %IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_PS_BUFFER set in them.
3273 *
3274 * Another race condition can happen on some devices like iwlwifi
3275 * when there are frames queued for the station and it wakes up
3276 * or polls; the frames that are already queued could end up being
3277 * transmitted first instead, causing reordering and/or wrong
3278 * processing of the EOSP. The cause is that allowing frames to be
3279 * transmitted to a certain station is out-of-band communication to
3280 * the device. To allow this problem to be solved, the driver can
3281 * call ieee80211_sta_block_awake() if frames are buffered when it
3282 * is notified that the station went to sleep. When all these frames
3283 * have been filtered (see above), it must call the function again
3284 * to indicate that the station is no longer blocked.
3285 *
3286 * If the driver buffers frames in the driver for aggregation in any
3287 * way, it must use the ieee80211_sta_set_buffered() call when it is
3288 * notified of the station going to sleep to inform mac80211 of any
3289 * TIDs that have frames buffered. Note that when a station wakes up
3290 * this information is reset (hence the requirement to call it when
3291 * informed of the station going to sleep). Then, when a service
3292 * period starts for any reason, @release_buffered_frames is called
3293 * with the number of frames to be released and which TIDs they are
3294 * to come from. In this case, the driver is responsible for setting
3295 * the EOSP (for uAPSD) and MORE_DATA bits in the released frames,
3296 * to help the @more_data parameter is passed to tell the driver if
3297 * there is more data on other TIDs -- the TIDs to release frames
3298 * from are ignored since mac80211 doesn't know how many frames the
3299 * buffers for those TIDs contain.
3300 *
3301 * If the driver also implement GO mode, where absence periods may
3302 * shorten service periods (or abort PS-Poll responses), it must
3303 * filter those response frames except in the case of frames that
3304 * are buffered in the driver -- those must remain buffered to avoid
3305 * reordering. Because it is possible that no frames are released
3306 * in this case, the driver must call ieee80211_sta_eosp()
3307 * to indicate to mac80211 that the service period ended anyway.
3308 *
3309 * Finally, if frames from multiple TIDs are released from mac80211
3310 * but the driver might reorder them, it must clear & set the flags
3311 * appropriately (only the last frame may have %IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_EOSP)
3312 * and also take care of the EOSP and MORE_DATA bits in the frame.
3313 * The driver may also use ieee80211_sta_eosp() in this case.
3314 *
3315 * Note that if the driver ever buffers frames other than QoS-data
3316 * frames, it must take care to never send a non-QoS-data frame as
3317 * the last frame in a service period, adding a QoS-nulldata frame
3318 * after a non-QoS-data frame if needed.
3319 */
3320
3321 /**
3322 * DOC: HW queue control
3323 *
3324 * Before HW queue control was introduced, mac80211 only had a single static
3325 * assignment of per-interface AC software queues to hardware queues. This
3326 * was problematic for a few reasons:
3327 * 1) off-channel transmissions might get stuck behind other frames
3328 * 2) multiple virtual interfaces couldn't be handled correctly
3329 * 3) after-DTIM frames could get stuck behind other frames
3330 *
3331 * To solve this, hardware typically uses multiple different queues for all
3332 * the different usages, and this needs to be propagated into mac80211 so it
3333 * won't have the same problem with the software queues.
3334 *
3335 * Therefore, mac80211 now offers the %IEEE80211_HW_QUEUE_CONTROL capability
3336 * flag that tells it that the driver implements its own queue control. To do
3337 * so, the driver will set up the various queues in each &struct ieee80211_vif
3338 * and the offchannel queue in &struct ieee80211_hw. In response, mac80211 will
3339 * use those queue IDs in the hw_queue field of &struct ieee80211_tx_info and
3340 * if necessary will queue the frame on the right software queue that mirrors
3341 * the hardware queue.
3342 * Additionally, the driver has to then use these HW queue IDs for the queue
3343 * management functions (ieee80211_stop_queue() et al.)
3344 *
3345 * The driver is free to set up the queue mappings as needed, multiple virtual
3346 * interfaces may map to the same hardware queues if needed. The setup has to
3347 * happen during add_interface or change_interface callbacks. For example, a
3348 * driver supporting station+station and station+AP modes might decide to have
3349 * 10 hardware queues to handle different scenarios:
3350 *
3351 * 4 AC HW queues for 1st vif: 0, 1, 2, 3
3352 * 4 AC HW queues for 2nd vif: 4, 5, 6, 7
3353 * after-DTIM queue for AP: 8
3354 * off-channel queue: 9
3355 *
3356 * It would then set up the hardware like this:
3357 * hw.offchannel_tx_hw_queue = 9
3358 *
3359 * and the first virtual interface that is added as follows:
3360 * vif.hw_queue[IEEE80211_AC_VO] = 0
3361 * vif.hw_queue[IEEE80211_AC_VI] = 1
3362 * vif.hw_queue[IEEE80211_AC_BE] = 2
3363 * vif.hw_queue[IEEE80211_AC_BK] = 3
3364 * vif.cab_queue = 8 // if AP mode, otherwise %IEEE80211_INVAL_HW_QUEUE
3365 * and the second virtual interface with 4-7.
3366 *
3367 * If queue 6 gets full, for example, mac80211 would only stop the second
3368 * virtual interface's BE queue since virtual interface queues are per AC.
3369 *
3370 * Note that the vif.cab_queue value should be set to %IEEE80211_INVAL_HW_QUEUE
3371 * whenever the queue is not used (i.e. the interface is not in AP mode) if the
3372 * queue could potentially be shared since mac80211 will look at cab_queue when
3373 * a queue is stopped/woken even if the interface is not in AP mode.
3374 */
3375
3376 /**
3377 * enum ieee80211_filter_flags - hardware filter flags
3378 *
3379 * These flags determine what the filter in hardware should be
3380 * programmed to let through and what should not be passed to the
3381 * stack. It is always safe to pass more frames than requested,
3382 * but this has negative impact on power consumption.
3383 *
3384 * @FIF_ALLMULTI: pass all multicast frames, this is used if requested
3385 * by the user or if the hardware is not capable of filtering by
3386 * multicast address.
3387 *
3388 * @FIF_FCSFAIL: pass frames with failed FCS (but you need to set the
3389 * %RX_FLAG_FAILED_FCS_CRC for them)
3390 *
3391 * @FIF_PLCPFAIL: pass frames with failed PLCP CRC (but you need to set
3392 * the %RX_FLAG_FAILED_PLCP_CRC for them
3393 *
3394 * @FIF_BCN_PRBRESP_PROMISC: This flag is set during scanning to indicate
3395 * to the hardware that it should not filter beacons or probe responses
3396 * by BSSID. Filtering them can greatly reduce the amount of processing
3397 * mac80211 needs to do and the amount of CPU wakeups, so you should
3398 * honour this flag if possible.
3399 *
3400 * @FIF_CONTROL: pass control frames (except for PS Poll) addressed to this
3401 * station
3402 *
3403 * @FIF_OTHER_BSS: pass frames destined to other BSSes
3404 *
3405 * @FIF_PSPOLL: pass PS Poll frames
3406 *
3407 * @FIF_PROBE_REQ: pass probe request frames
3408 *
3409 * @FIF_MCAST_ACTION: pass multicast Action frames
3410 */
3411 enum ieee80211_filter_flags {
3412 FIF_ALLMULTI = 1<<1,
3413 FIF_FCSFAIL = 1<<2,
3414 FIF_PLCPFAIL = 1<<3,
3415 FIF_BCN_PRBRESP_PROMISC = 1<<4,
3416 FIF_CONTROL = 1<<5,
3417 FIF_OTHER_BSS = 1<<6,
3418 FIF_PSPOLL = 1<<7,
3419 FIF_PROBE_REQ = 1<<8,
3420 FIF_MCAST_ACTION = 1<<9,
3421 };
3422
3423 /**
3424 * enum ieee80211_ampdu_mlme_action - A-MPDU actions
3425 *
3426 * These flags are used with the ampdu_action() callback in
3427 * &struct ieee80211_ops to indicate which action is needed.
3428 *
3429 * Note that drivers MUST be able to deal with a TX aggregation
3430 * session being stopped even before they OK'ed starting it by
3431 * calling ieee80211_start_tx_ba_cb_irqsafe, because the peer
3432 * might receive the addBA frame and send a delBA right away!
3433 *
3434 * @IEEE80211_AMPDU_RX_START: start RX aggregation
3435 * @IEEE80211_AMPDU_RX_STOP: stop RX aggregation
3436 * @IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_START: start TX aggregation, the driver must either
3437 * call ieee80211_start_tx_ba_cb_irqsafe() or
3438 * call ieee80211_start_tx_ba_cb_irqsafe() with status
3439 * %IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_START_DELAY_ADDBA to delay addba after
3440 * ieee80211_start_tx_ba_cb_irqsafe is called, or just return the special
3441 * status %IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_START_IMMEDIATE.
3442 * @IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_OPERATIONAL: TX aggregation has become operational
3443 * @IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_STOP_CONT: stop TX aggregation but continue transmitting
3444 * queued packets, now unaggregated. After all packets are transmitted the
3445 * driver has to call ieee80211_stop_tx_ba_cb_irqsafe().
3446 * @IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_STOP_FLUSH: stop TX aggregation and flush all packets,
3447 * called when the station is removed. There's no need or reason to call
3448 * ieee80211_stop_tx_ba_cb_irqsafe() in this case as mac80211 assumes the
3449 * session is gone and removes the station.
3450 * @IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_STOP_FLUSH_CONT: called when TX aggregation is stopped
3451 * but the driver hasn't called ieee80211_stop_tx_ba_cb_irqsafe() yet and
3452 * now the connection is dropped and the station will be removed. Drivers
3453 * should clean up and drop remaining packets when this is called.
3454 */
3455 enum ieee80211_ampdu_mlme_action {
3456 IEEE80211_AMPDU_RX_START,
3457 IEEE80211_AMPDU_RX_STOP,
3458 IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_START,
3459 IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_STOP_CONT,
3460 IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_STOP_FLUSH,
3461 IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_STOP_FLUSH_CONT,
3462 IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_OPERATIONAL,
3463 };
3464
3465 #define IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_START_IMMEDIATE 1
3466 #define IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_START_DELAY_ADDBA 2
3467
3468 /**
3469 * struct ieee80211_ampdu_params - AMPDU action parameters
3470 *
3471 * @action: the ampdu action, value from %ieee80211_ampdu_mlme_action.
3472 * @sta: peer of this AMPDU session
3473 * @tid: tid of the BA session
3474 * @ssn: start sequence number of the session. TX/RX_STOP can pass 0. When
3475 * action is set to %IEEE80211_AMPDU_RX_START the driver passes back the
3476 * actual ssn value used to start the session and writes the value here.
3477 * @buf_size: reorder buffer size (number of subframes). Valid only when the
3478 * action is set to %IEEE80211_AMPDU_RX_START or
3479 * %IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_OPERATIONAL
3480 * @amsdu: indicates the peer's ability to receive A-MSDU within A-MPDU.
3481 * valid when the action is set to %IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_OPERATIONAL
3482 * @timeout: BA session timeout. Valid only when the action is set to
3483 * %IEEE80211_AMPDU_RX_START
3484 */
3485 struct ieee80211_ampdu_params {
3486 enum ieee80211_ampdu_mlme_action action;
3487 struct ieee80211_sta *sta;
3488 u16 tid;
3489 u16 ssn;
3490 u16 buf_size;
3491 bool amsdu;
3492 u16 timeout;
3493 };
3494
3495 /**
3496 * enum ieee80211_frame_release_type - frame release reason
3497 * @IEEE80211_FRAME_RELEASE_PSPOLL: frame released for PS-Poll
3498 * @IEEE80211_FRAME_RELEASE_UAPSD: frame(s) released due to
3499 * frame received on trigger-enabled AC
3500 */
3501 enum ieee80211_frame_release_type {
3502 IEEE80211_FRAME_RELEASE_PSPOLL,
3503 IEEE80211_FRAME_RELEASE_UAPSD,
3504 };
3505
3506 /**
3507 * enum ieee80211_rate_control_changed - flags to indicate what changed
3508 *
3509 * @IEEE80211_RC_BW_CHANGED: The bandwidth that can be used to transmit
3510 * to this station changed. The actual bandwidth is in the station
3511 * information -- for HT20/40 the IEEE80211_HT_CAP_SUP_WIDTH_20_40
3512 * flag changes, for HT and VHT the bandwidth field changes.
3513 * @IEEE80211_RC_SMPS_CHANGED: The SMPS state of the station changed.
3514 * @IEEE80211_RC_SUPP_RATES_CHANGED: The supported rate set of this peer
3515 * changed (in IBSS mode) due to discovering more information about
3516 * the peer.
3517 * @IEEE80211_RC_NSS_CHANGED: N_SS (number of spatial streams) was changed
3518 * by the peer
3519 */
3520 enum ieee80211_rate_control_changed {
3521 IEEE80211_RC_BW_CHANGED = BIT(0),
3522 IEEE80211_RC_SMPS_CHANGED = BIT(1),
3523 IEEE80211_RC_SUPP_RATES_CHANGED = BIT(2),
3524 IEEE80211_RC_NSS_CHANGED = BIT(3),
3525 };
3526
3527 /**
3528 * enum ieee80211_roc_type - remain on channel type
3529 *
3530 * With the support for multi channel contexts and multi channel operations,
3531 * remain on channel operations might be limited/deferred/aborted by other
3532 * flows/operations which have higher priority (and vice versa).
3533 * Specifying the ROC type can be used by devices to prioritize the ROC
3534 * operations compared to other operations/flows.
3535 *
3536 * @IEEE80211_ROC_TYPE_NORMAL: There are no special requirements for this ROC.
3537 * @IEEE80211_ROC_TYPE_MGMT_TX: The remain on channel request is required
3538 * for sending management frames offchannel.
3539 */
3540 enum ieee80211_roc_type {
3541 IEEE80211_ROC_TYPE_NORMAL = 0,
3542 IEEE80211_ROC_TYPE_MGMT_TX,
3543 };
3544
3545 /**
3546 * enum ieee80211_reconfig_type - reconfig type
3547 *
3548 * This enum is used by the reconfig_complete() callback to indicate what
3549 * reconfiguration type was completed.
3550 *
3551 * @IEEE80211_RECONFIG_TYPE_RESTART: hw restart type
3552 * (also due to resume() callback returning 1)
3553 * @IEEE80211_RECONFIG_TYPE_SUSPEND: suspend type (regardless
3554 * of wowlan configuration)
3555 */
3556 enum ieee80211_reconfig_type {
3557 IEEE80211_RECONFIG_TYPE_RESTART,
3558 IEEE80211_RECONFIG_TYPE_SUSPEND,
3559 };
3560
3561 /**
3562 * struct ieee80211_prep_tx_info - prepare TX information
3563 * @duration: if non-zero, hint about the required duration,
3564 * only used with the mgd_prepare_tx() method.
3565 * @subtype: frame subtype (auth, (re)assoc, deauth, disassoc)
3566 * @success: whether the frame exchange was successful, only
3567 * used with the mgd_complete_tx() method, and then only
3568 * valid for auth and (re)assoc.
3569 */
3570 struct ieee80211_prep_tx_info {
3571 u16 duration;
3572 u16 subtype;
3573 u8 success:1;
3574 };
3575
3576 /**
3577 * struct ieee80211_ops - callbacks from mac80211 to the driver
3578 *
3579 * This structure contains various callbacks that the driver may
3580 * handle or, in some cases, must handle, for example to configure
3581 * the hardware to a new channel or to transmit a frame.
3582 *
3583 * @tx: Handler that 802.11 module calls for each transmitted frame.
3584 * skb contains the buffer starting from the IEEE 802.11 header.
3585 * The low-level driver should send the frame out based on
3586 * configuration in the TX control data. This handler should,
3587 * preferably, never fail and stop queues appropriately.
3588 * Must be atomic.
3589 *
3590 * @start: Called before the first netdevice attached to the hardware
3591 * is enabled. This should turn on the hardware and must turn on
3592 * frame reception (for possibly enabled monitor interfaces.)
3593 * Returns negative error codes, these may be seen in userspace,
3594 * or zero.
3595 * When the device is started it should not have a MAC address
3596 * to avoid acknowledging frames before a non-monitor device
3597 * is added.
3598 * Must be implemented and can sleep.
3599 *
3600 * @stop: Called after last netdevice attached to the hardware
3601 * is disabled. This should turn off the hardware (at least
3602 * it must turn off frame reception.)
3603 * May be called right after add_interface if that rejects
3604 * an interface. If you added any work onto the mac80211 workqueue
3605 * you should ensure to cancel it on this callback.
3606 * Must be implemented and can sleep.
3607 *
3608 * @suspend: Suspend the device; mac80211 itself will quiesce before and
3609 * stop transmitting and doing any other configuration, and then
3610 * ask the device to suspend. This is only invoked when WoWLAN is
3611 * configured, otherwise the device is deconfigured completely and
3612 * reconfigured at resume time.
3613 * The driver may also impose special conditions under which it
3614 * wants to use the "normal" suspend (deconfigure), say if it only
3615 * supports WoWLAN when the device is associated. In this case, it
3616 * must return 1 from this function.
3617 *
3618 * @resume: If WoWLAN was configured, this indicates that mac80211 is
3619 * now resuming its operation, after this the device must be fully
3620 * functional again. If this returns an error, the only way out is
3621 * to also unregister the device. If it returns 1, then mac80211
3622 * will also go through the regular complete restart on resume.
3623 *
3624 * @set_wakeup: Enable or disable wakeup when WoWLAN configuration is
3625 * modified. The reason is that device_set_wakeup_enable() is
3626 * supposed to be called when the configuration changes, not only
3627 * in suspend().
3628 *
3629 * @add_interface: Called when a netdevice attached to the hardware is
3630 * enabled. Because it is not called for monitor mode devices, @start
3631 * and @stop must be implemented.
3632 * The driver should perform any initialization it needs before
3633 * the device can be enabled. The initial configuration for the
3634 * interface is given in the conf parameter.
3635 * The callback may refuse to add an interface by returning a
3636 * negative error code (which will be seen in userspace.)
3637 * Must be implemented and can sleep.
3638 *
3639 * @change_interface: Called when a netdevice changes type. This callback
3640 * is optional, but only if it is supported can interface types be
3641 * switched while the interface is UP. The callback may sleep.
3642 * Note that while an interface is being switched, it will not be
3643 * found by the interface iteration callbacks.
3644 *
3645 * @remove_interface: Notifies a driver that an interface is going down.
3646 * The @stop callback is called after this if it is the last interface
3647 * and no monitor interfaces are present.
3648 * When all interfaces are removed, the MAC address in the hardware
3649 * must be cleared so the device no longer acknowledges packets,
3650 * the mac_addr member of the conf structure is, however, set to the
3651 * MAC address of the device going away.
3652 * Hence, this callback must be implemented. It can sleep.
3653 *
3654 * @config: Handler for configuration requests. IEEE 802.11 code calls this
3655 * function to change hardware configuration, e.g., channel.
3656 * This function should never fail but returns a negative error code
3657 * if it does. The callback can sleep.
3658 *
3659 * @bss_info_changed: Handler for configuration requests related to BSS
3660 * parameters that may vary during BSS's lifespan, and may affect low
3661 * level driver (e.g. assoc/disassoc status, erp parameters).
3662 * This function should not be used if no BSS has been set, unless
3663 * for association indication. The @changed parameter indicates which
3664 * of the bss parameters has changed when a call is made. The callback
3665 * can sleep.
3666 * Note: this callback is called if @vif_cfg_changed or @link_info_changed
3667 * are not implemented.
3668 *
3669 * @vif_cfg_changed: Handler for configuration requests related to interface
3670 * (MLD) parameters from &struct ieee80211_vif_cfg that vary during the
3671 * lifetime of the interface (e.g. assoc status, IP addresses, etc.)
3672 * The @changed parameter indicates which value changed.
3673 * The callback can sleep.
3674 *
3675 * @link_info_changed: Handler for configuration requests related to link
3676 * parameters from &struct ieee80211_bss_conf that are related to an
3677 * individual link. e.g. legacy/HT/VHT/... rate information.
3678 * The @changed parameter indicates which value changed, and the @link_id
3679 * parameter indicates the link ID. Note that the @link_id will be 0 for
3680 * non-MLO connections.
3681 * The callback can sleep.
3682 *
3683 * @prepare_multicast: Prepare for multicast filter configuration.
3684 * This callback is optional, and its return value is passed
3685 * to configure_filter(). This callback must be atomic.
3686 *
3687 * @configure_filter: Configure the device's RX filter.
3688 * See the section "Frame filtering" for more information.
3689 * This callback must be implemented and can sleep.
3690 *
3691 * @config_iface_filter: Configure the interface's RX filter.
3692 * This callback is optional and is used to configure which frames
3693 * should be passed to mac80211. The filter_flags is the combination
3694 * of FIF_* flags. The changed_flags is a bit mask that indicates
3695 * which flags are changed.
3696 * This callback can sleep.
3697 *
3698 * @set_tim: Set TIM bit. mac80211 calls this function when a TIM bit
3699 * must be set or cleared for a given STA. Must be atomic.
3700 *
3701 * @set_key: See the section "Hardware crypto acceleration"
3702 * This callback is only called between add_interface and
3703 * remove_interface calls, i.e. while the given virtual interface
3704 * is enabled.
3705 * Returns a negative error code if the key can't be added.
3706 * The callback can sleep.
3707 *
3708 * @update_tkip_key: See the section "Hardware crypto acceleration"
3709 * This callback will be called in the context of Rx. Called for drivers
3710 * which set IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_TKIP_REQ_RX_P1_KEY.
3711 * The callback must be atomic.
3712 *
3713 * @set_rekey_data: If the device supports GTK rekeying, for example while the
3714 * host is suspended, it can assign this callback to retrieve the data
3715 * necessary to do GTK rekeying, this is the KEK, KCK and replay counter.
3716 * After rekeying was done it should (for example during resume) notify
3717 * userspace of the new replay counter using ieee80211_gtk_rekey_notify().
3718 *
3719 * @set_default_unicast_key: Set the default (unicast) key index, useful for
3720 * WEP when the device sends data packets autonomously, e.g. for ARP
3721 * offloading. The index can be 0-3, or -1 for unsetting it.
3722 *
3723 * @hw_scan: Ask the hardware to service the scan request, no need to start
3724 * the scan state machine in stack. The scan must honour the channel
3725 * configuration done by the regulatory agent in the wiphy's
3726 * registered bands. The hardware (or the driver) needs to make sure
3727 * that power save is disabled.
3728 * The @req ie/ie_len members are rewritten by mac80211 to contain the
3729 * entire IEs after the SSID, so that drivers need not look at these
3730 * at all but just send them after the SSID -- mac80211 includes the
3731 * (extended) supported rates and HT information (where applicable).
3732 * When the scan finishes, ieee80211_scan_completed() must be called;
3733 * note that it also must be called when the scan cannot finish due to
3734 * any error unless this callback returned a negative error code.
3735 * This callback is also allowed to return the special return value 1,
3736 * this indicates that hardware scan isn't desirable right now and a
3737 * software scan should be done instead. A driver wishing to use this
3738 * capability must ensure its (hardware) scan capabilities aren't
3739 * advertised as more capable than mac80211's software scan is.
3740 * The callback can sleep.
3741 *
3742 * @cancel_hw_scan: Ask the low-level tp cancel the active hw scan.
3743 * The driver should ask the hardware to cancel the scan (if possible),
3744 * but the scan will be completed only after the driver will call
3745 * ieee80211_scan_completed().
3746 * This callback is needed for wowlan, to prevent enqueueing a new
3747 * scan_work after the low-level driver was already suspended.
3748 * The callback can sleep.
3749 *
3750 * @sched_scan_start: Ask the hardware to start scanning repeatedly at
3751 * specific intervals. The driver must call the
3752 * ieee80211_sched_scan_results() function whenever it finds results.
3753 * This process will continue until sched_scan_stop is called.
3754 *
3755 * @sched_scan_stop: Tell the hardware to stop an ongoing scheduled scan.
3756 * In this case, ieee80211_sched_scan_stopped() must not be called.
3757 *
3758 * @sw_scan_start: Notifier function that is called just before a software scan
3759 * is started. Can be NULL, if the driver doesn't need this notification.
3760 * The mac_addr parameter allows supporting NL80211_SCAN_FLAG_RANDOM_ADDR,
3761 * the driver may set the NL80211_FEATURE_SCAN_RANDOM_MAC_ADDR flag if it
3762 * can use this parameter. The callback can sleep.
3763 *
3764 * @sw_scan_complete: Notifier function that is called just after a
3765 * software scan finished. Can be NULL, if the driver doesn't need
3766 * this notification.
3767 * The callback can sleep.
3768 *
3769 * @get_stats: Return low-level statistics.
3770 * Returns zero if statistics are available.
3771 * The callback can sleep.
3772 *
3773 * @get_key_seq: If your device implements encryption in hardware and does
3774 * IV/PN assignment then this callback should be provided to read the
3775 * IV/PN for the given key from hardware.
3776 * The callback must be atomic.
3777 *
3778 * @set_frag_threshold: Configuration of fragmentation threshold. Assign this
3779 * if the device does fragmentation by itself. Note that to prevent the
3780 * stack from doing fragmentation IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_TX_FRAG
3781 * should be set as well.
3782 * The callback can sleep.
3783 *
3784 * @set_rts_threshold: Configuration of RTS threshold (if device needs it)
3785 * The callback can sleep.
3786 *
3787 * @sta_add: Notifies low level driver about addition of an associated station,
3788 * AP, IBSS/WDS/mesh peer etc. This callback can sleep.
3789 *
3790 * @sta_remove: Notifies low level driver about removal of an associated
3791 * station, AP, IBSS/WDS/mesh peer etc. Note that after the callback
3792 * returns it isn't safe to use the pointer, not even RCU protected;
3793 * no RCU grace period is guaranteed between returning here and freeing
3794 * the station. See @sta_pre_rcu_remove if needed.
3795 * This callback can sleep.
3796 *
3797 * @sta_add_debugfs: Drivers can use this callback to add debugfs files
3798 * when a station is added to mac80211's station list. This callback
3799 * should be within a CONFIG_MAC80211_DEBUGFS conditional. This
3800 * callback can sleep.
3801 *
3802 * @sta_notify: Notifies low level driver about power state transition of an
3803 * associated station, AP, IBSS/WDS/mesh peer etc. For a VIF operating
3804 * in AP mode, this callback will not be called when the flag
3805 * %IEEE80211_HW_AP_LINK_PS is set. Must be atomic.
3806 *
3807 * @sta_set_txpwr: Configure the station tx power. This callback set the tx
3808 * power for the station.
3809 * This callback can sleep.
3810 *
3811 * @sta_state: Notifies low level driver about state transition of a
3812 * station (which can be the AP, a client, IBSS/WDS/mesh peer etc.)
3813 * This callback is mutually exclusive with @sta_add/@sta_remove.
3814 * It must not fail for down transitions but may fail for transitions
3815 * up the list of states. Also note that after the callback returns it
3816 * isn't safe to use the pointer, not even RCU protected - no RCU grace
3817 * period is guaranteed between returning here and freeing the station.
3818 * See @sta_pre_rcu_remove if needed.
3819 * The callback can sleep.
3820 *
3821 * @sta_pre_rcu_remove: Notify driver about station removal before RCU
3822 * synchronisation. This is useful if a driver needs to have station
3823 * pointers protected using RCU, it can then use this call to clear
3824 * the pointers instead of waiting for an RCU grace period to elapse
3825 * in @sta_state.
3826 * The callback can sleep.
3827 *
3828 * @sta_rc_update: Notifies the driver of changes to the bitrates that can be
3829 * used to transmit to the station. The changes are advertised with bits
3830 * from &enum ieee80211_rate_control_changed and the values are reflected
3831 * in the station data. This callback should only be used when the driver
3832 * uses hardware rate control (%IEEE80211_HW_HAS_RATE_CONTROL) since
3833 * otherwise the rate control algorithm is notified directly.
3834 * Must be atomic.
3835 * @sta_rate_tbl_update: Notifies the driver that the rate table changed. This
3836 * is only used if the configured rate control algorithm actually uses
3837 * the new rate table API, and is therefore optional. Must be atomic.
3838 *
3839 * @sta_statistics: Get statistics for this station. For example with beacon
3840 * filtering, the statistics kept by mac80211 might not be accurate, so
3841 * let the driver pre-fill the statistics. The driver can fill most of
3842 * the values (indicating which by setting the filled bitmap), but not
3843 * all of them make sense - see the source for which ones are possible.
3844 * Statistics that the driver doesn't fill will be filled by mac80211.
3845 * The callback can sleep.
3846 *
3847 * @conf_tx: Configure TX queue parameters (EDCF (aifs, cw_min, cw_max),
3848 * bursting) for a hardware TX queue.
3849 * Returns a negative error code on failure.
3850 * The callback can sleep.
3851 *
3852 * @get_tsf: Get the current TSF timer value from firmware/hardware. Currently,
3853 * this is only used for IBSS mode BSSID merging and debugging. Is not a
3854 * required function.
3855 * The callback can sleep.
3856 *
3857 * @set_tsf: Set the TSF timer to the specified value in the firmware/hardware.
3858 * Currently, this is only used for IBSS mode debugging. Is not a
3859 * required function.
3860 * The callback can sleep.
3861 *
3862 * @offset_tsf: Offset the TSF timer by the specified value in the
3863 * firmware/hardware. Preferred to set_tsf as it avoids delay between
3864 * calling set_tsf() and hardware getting programmed, which will show up
3865 * as TSF delay. Is not a required function.
3866 * The callback can sleep.
3867 *
3868 * @reset_tsf: Reset the TSF timer and allow firmware/hardware to synchronize
3869 * with other STAs in the IBSS. This is only used in IBSS mode. This
3870 * function is optional if the firmware/hardware takes full care of
3871 * TSF synchronization.
3872 * The callback can sleep.
3873 *
3874 * @tx_last_beacon: Determine whether the last IBSS beacon was sent by us.
3875 * This is needed only for IBSS mode and the result of this function is
3876 * used to determine whether to reply to Probe Requests.
3877 * Returns non-zero if this device sent the last beacon.
3878 * The callback can sleep.
3879 *
3880 * @get_survey: Return per-channel survey information
3881 *
3882 * @rfkill_poll: Poll rfkill hardware state. If you need this, you also
3883 * need to set wiphy->rfkill_poll to %true before registration,
3884 * and need to call wiphy_rfkill_set_hw_state() in the callback.
3885 * The callback can sleep.
3886 *
3887 * @set_coverage_class: Set slot time for given coverage class as specified
3888 * in IEEE 802.11-2007 section 17.3.8.6 and modify ACK timeout
3889 * accordingly; coverage class equals to -1 to enable ACK timeout
3890 * estimation algorithm (dynack). To disable dynack set valid value for
3891 * coverage class. This callback is not required and may sleep.
3892 *
3893 * @testmode_cmd: Implement a cfg80211 test mode command. The passed @vif may
3894 * be %NULL. The callback can sleep.
3895 * @testmode_dump: Implement a cfg80211 test mode dump. The callback can sleep.
3896 *
3897 * @flush: Flush all pending frames from the hardware queue, making sure
3898 * that the hardware queues are empty. The @queues parameter is a bitmap
3899 * of queues to flush, which is useful if different virtual interfaces
3900 * use different hardware queues; it may also indicate all queues.
3901 * If the parameter @drop is set to %true, pending frames may be dropped.
3902 * Note that vif can be NULL.
3903 * The callback can sleep.
3904 *
3905 * @channel_switch: Drivers that need (or want) to offload the channel
3906 * switch operation for CSAs received from the AP may implement this
3907 * callback. They must then call ieee80211_chswitch_done() to indicate
3908 * completion of the channel switch.
3909 *
3910 * @set_antenna: Set antenna configuration (tx_ant, rx_ant) on the device.
3911 * Parameters are bitmaps of allowed antennas to use for TX/RX. Drivers may
3912 * reject TX/RX mask combinations they cannot support by returning -EINVAL
3913 * (also see nl80211.h @NL80211_ATTR_WIPHY_ANTENNA_TX).
3914 *
3915 * @get_antenna: Get current antenna configuration from device (tx_ant, rx_ant).
3916 *
3917 * @remain_on_channel: Starts an off-channel period on the given channel, must
3918 * call back to ieee80211_ready_on_channel() when on that channel. Note
3919 * that normal channel traffic is not stopped as this is intended for hw
3920 * offload. Frames to transmit on the off-channel channel are transmitted
3921 * normally except for the %IEEE80211_TX_CTL_TX_OFFCHAN flag. When the
3922 * duration (which will always be non-zero) expires, the driver must call
3923 * ieee80211_remain_on_channel_expired().
3924 * Note that this callback may be called while the device is in IDLE and
3925 * must be accepted in this case.
3926 * This callback may sleep.
3927 * @cancel_remain_on_channel: Requests that an ongoing off-channel period is
3928 * aborted before it expires. This callback may sleep.
3929 *
3930 * @set_ringparam: Set tx and rx ring sizes.
3931 *
3932 * @get_ringparam: Get tx and rx ring current and maximum sizes.
3933 *
3934 * @tx_frames_pending: Check if there is any pending frame in the hardware
3935 * queues before entering power save.
3936 *
3937 * @set_bitrate_mask: Set a mask of rates to be used for rate control selection
3938 * when transmitting a frame. Currently only legacy rates are handled.
3939 * The callback can sleep.
3940 * @event_callback: Notify driver about any event in mac80211. See
3941 * &enum ieee80211_event_type for the different types.
3942 * The callback must be atomic.
3943 *
3944 * @release_buffered_frames: Release buffered frames according to the given
3945 * parameters. In the case where the driver buffers some frames for
3946 * sleeping stations mac80211 will use this callback to tell the driver
3947 * to release some frames, either for PS-poll or uAPSD.
3948 * Note that if the @more_data parameter is %false the driver must check
3949 * if there are more frames on the given TIDs, and if there are more than
3950 * the frames being released then it must still set the more-data bit in
3951 * the frame. If the @more_data parameter is %true, then of course the
3952 * more-data bit must always be set.
3953 * The @tids parameter tells the driver which TIDs to release frames
3954 * from, for PS-poll it will always have only a single bit set.
3955 * In the case this is used for a PS-poll initiated release, the
3956 * @num_frames parameter will always be 1 so code can be shared. In
3957 * this case the driver must also set %IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_EOSP flag
3958 * on the TX status (and must report TX status) so that the PS-poll
3959 * period is properly ended. This is used to avoid sending multiple
3960 * responses for a retried PS-poll frame.
3961 * In the case this is used for uAPSD, the @num_frames parameter may be
3962 * bigger than one, but the driver may send fewer frames (it must send
3963 * at least one, however). In this case it is also responsible for
3964 * setting the EOSP flag in the QoS header of the frames. Also, when the
3965 * service period ends, the driver must set %IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_EOSP
3966 * on the last frame in the SP. Alternatively, it may call the function
3967 * ieee80211_sta_eosp() to inform mac80211 of the end of the SP.
3968 * This callback must be atomic.
3969 * @allow_buffered_frames: Prepare device to allow the given number of frames
3970 * to go out to the given station. The frames will be sent by mac80211
3971 * via the usual TX path after this call. The TX information for frames
3972 * released will also have the %IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_PS_BUFFER flag set
3973 * and the last one will also have %IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_EOSP set. In case
3974 * frames from multiple TIDs are released and the driver might reorder
3975 * them between the TIDs, it must set the %IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_EOSP flag
3976 * on the last frame and clear it on all others and also handle the EOSP
3977 * bit in the QoS header correctly. Alternatively, it can also call the
3978 * ieee80211_sta_eosp() function.
3979 * The @tids parameter is a bitmap and tells the driver which TIDs the
3980 * frames will be on; it will at most have two bits set.
3981 * This callback must be atomic.
3982 *
3983 * @get_et_sset_count: Ethtool API to get string-set count.
3984 *
3985 * @get_et_stats: Ethtool API to get a set of u64 stats.
3986 *
3987 * @get_et_strings: Ethtool API to get a set of strings to describe stats
3988 * and perhaps other supported types of ethtool data-sets.
3989 *
3990 * @mgd_prepare_tx: Prepare for transmitting a management frame for association
3991 * before associated. In multi-channel scenarios, a virtual interface is
3992 * bound to a channel before it is associated, but as it isn't associated
3993 * yet it need not necessarily be given airtime, in particular since any
3994 * transmission to a P2P GO needs to be synchronized against the GO's
3995 * powersave state. mac80211 will call this function before transmitting a
3996 * management frame prior to having successfully associated to allow the
3997 * driver to give it channel time for the transmission, to get a response
3998 * and to be able to synchronize with the GO.
3999 * For drivers that set %IEEE80211_HW_DEAUTH_NEED_MGD_TX_PREP, mac80211
4000 * would also call this function before transmitting a deauthentication
4001 * frame in case that no beacon was heard from the AP/P2P GO.
4002 * The callback will be called before each transmission and upon return
4003 * mac80211 will transmit the frame right away.
4004 * Additional information is passed in the &struct ieee80211_prep_tx_info
4005 * data. If duration there is greater than zero, mac80211 hints to the
4006 * driver the duration for which the operation is requested.
4007 * The callback is optional and can (should!) sleep.
4008 * @mgd_complete_tx: Notify the driver that the response frame for a previously
4009 * transmitted frame announced with @mgd_prepare_tx was received, the data
4010 * is filled similarly to @mgd_prepare_tx though the duration is not used.
4011 *
4012 * @mgd_protect_tdls_discover: Protect a TDLS discovery session. After sending
4013 * a TDLS discovery-request, we expect a reply to arrive on the AP's
4014 * channel. We must stay on the channel (no PSM, scan, etc.), since a TDLS
4015 * setup-response is a direct packet not buffered by the AP.
4016 * mac80211 will call this function just before the transmission of a TDLS
4017 * discovery-request. The recommended period of protection is at least
4018 * 2 * (DTIM period).
4019 * The callback is optional and can sleep.
4020 *
4021 * @add_chanctx: Notifies device driver about new channel context creation.
4022 * This callback may sleep.
4023 * @remove_chanctx: Notifies device driver about channel context destruction.
4024 * This callback may sleep.
4025 * @change_chanctx: Notifies device driver about channel context changes that
4026 * may happen when combining different virtual interfaces on the same
4027 * channel context with different settings
4028 * This callback may sleep.
4029 * @assign_vif_chanctx: Notifies device driver about channel context being bound
4030 * to vif. Possible use is for hw queue remapping.
4031 * This callback may sleep.
4032 * @unassign_vif_chanctx: Notifies device driver about channel context being
4033 * unbound from vif.
4034 * This callback may sleep.
4035 * @switch_vif_chanctx: switch a number of vifs from one chanctx to
4036 * another, as specified in the list of
4037 * @ieee80211_vif_chanctx_switch passed to the driver, according
4038 * to the mode defined in &ieee80211_chanctx_switch_mode.
4039 * This callback may sleep.
4040 *
4041 * @start_ap: Start operation on the AP interface, this is called after all the
4042 * information in bss_conf is set and beacon can be retrieved. A channel
4043 * context is bound before this is called. Note that if the driver uses
4044 * software scan or ROC, this (and @stop_ap) isn't called when the AP is
4045 * just "paused" for scanning/ROC, which is indicated by the beacon being
4046 * disabled/enabled via @bss_info_changed.
4047 * @stop_ap: Stop operation on the AP interface.
4048 *
4049 * @reconfig_complete: Called after a call to ieee80211_restart_hw() and
4050 * during resume, when the reconfiguration has completed.
4051 * This can help the driver implement the reconfiguration step (and
4052 * indicate mac80211 is ready to receive frames).
4053 * This callback may sleep.
4054 *
4055 * @ipv6_addr_change: IPv6 address assignment on the given interface changed.
4056 * Currently, this is only called for managed or P2P client interfaces.
4057 * This callback is optional; it must not sleep.
4058 *
4059 * @channel_switch_beacon: Starts a channel switch to a new channel.
4060 * Beacons are modified to include CSA or ECSA IEs before calling this
4061 * function. The corresponding count fields in these IEs must be
4062 * decremented, and when they reach 1 the driver must call
4063 * ieee80211_csa_finish(). Drivers which use ieee80211_beacon_get()
4064 * get the csa counter decremented by mac80211, but must check if it is
4065 * 1 using ieee80211_beacon_counter_is_complete() after the beacon has been
4066 * transmitted and then call ieee80211_csa_finish().
4067 * If the CSA count starts as zero or 1, this function will not be called,
4068 * since there won't be any time to beacon before the switch anyway.
4069 * @pre_channel_switch: This is an optional callback that is called
4070 * before a channel switch procedure is started (ie. when a STA
4071 * gets a CSA or a userspace initiated channel-switch), allowing
4072 * the driver to prepare for the channel switch.
4073 * @post_channel_switch: This is an optional callback that is called
4074 * after a channel switch procedure is completed, allowing the
4075 * driver to go back to a normal configuration.
4076 * @abort_channel_switch: This is an optional callback that is called
4077 * when channel switch procedure was completed, allowing the
4078 * driver to go back to a normal configuration.
4079 * @channel_switch_rx_beacon: This is an optional callback that is called
4080 * when channel switch procedure is in progress and additional beacon with
4081 * CSA IE was received, allowing driver to track changes in count.
4082 * @join_ibss: Join an IBSS (on an IBSS interface); this is called after all
4083 * information in bss_conf is set up and the beacon can be retrieved. A
4084 * channel context is bound before this is called.
4085 * @leave_ibss: Leave the IBSS again.
4086 *
4087 * @get_expected_throughput: extract the expected throughput towards the
4088 * specified station. The returned value is expressed in Kbps. It returns 0
4089 * if the RC algorithm does not have proper data to provide.
4090 *
4091 * @get_txpower: get current maximum tx power (in dBm) based on configuration
4092 * and hardware limits.
4093 *
4094 * @tdls_channel_switch: Start channel-switching with a TDLS peer. The driver
4095 * is responsible for continually initiating channel-switching operations
4096 * and returning to the base channel for communication with the AP. The
4097 * driver receives a channel-switch request template and the location of
4098 * the switch-timing IE within the template as part of the invocation.
4099 * The template is valid only within the call, and the driver can
4100 * optionally copy the skb for further re-use.
4101 * @tdls_cancel_channel_switch: Stop channel-switching with a TDLS peer. Both
4102 * peers must be on the base channel when the call completes.
4103 * @tdls_recv_channel_switch: a TDLS channel-switch related frame (request or
4104 * response) has been received from a remote peer. The driver gets
4105 * parameters parsed from the incoming frame and may use them to continue
4106 * an ongoing channel-switch operation. In addition, a channel-switch
4107 * response template is provided, together with the location of the
4108 * switch-timing IE within the template. The skb can only be used within
4109 * the function call.
4110 *
4111 * @wake_tx_queue: Called when new packets have been added to the queue.
4112 * @sync_rx_queues: Process all pending frames in RSS queues. This is a
4113 * synchronization which is needed in case driver has in its RSS queues
4114 * pending frames that were received prior to the control path action
4115 * currently taken (e.g. disassociation) but are not processed yet.
4116 *
4117 * @start_nan: join an existing NAN cluster, or create a new one.
4118 * @stop_nan: leave the NAN cluster.
4119 * @nan_change_conf: change NAN configuration. The data in cfg80211_nan_conf
4120 * contains full new configuration and changes specify which parameters
4121 * are changed with respect to the last NAN config.
4122 * The driver gets both full configuration and the changed parameters since
4123 * some devices may need the full configuration while others need only the
4124 * changed parameters.
4125 * @add_nan_func: Add a NAN function. Returns 0 on success. The data in
4126 * cfg80211_nan_func must not be referenced outside the scope of
4127 * this call.
4128 * @del_nan_func: Remove a NAN function. The driver must call
4129 * ieee80211_nan_func_terminated() with
4130 * NL80211_NAN_FUNC_TERM_REASON_USER_REQUEST reason code upon removal.
4131 * @can_aggregate_in_amsdu: Called in order to determine if HW supports
4132 * aggregating two specific frames in the same A-MSDU. The relation
4133 * between the skbs should be symmetric and transitive. Note that while
4134 * skb is always a real frame, head may or may not be an A-MSDU.
4135 * @get_ftm_responder_stats: Retrieve FTM responder statistics, if available.
4136 * Statistics should be cumulative, currently no way to reset is provided.
4137 *
4138 * @start_pmsr: start peer measurement (e.g. FTM) (this call can sleep)
4139 * @abort_pmsr: abort peer measurement (this call can sleep)
4140 * @set_tid_config: Apply TID specific configurations. This callback may sleep.
4141 * @reset_tid_config: Reset TID specific configuration for the peer.
4142 * This callback may sleep.
4143 * @update_vif_offload: Update virtual interface offload flags
4144 * This callback may sleep.
4145 * @sta_set_4addr: Called to notify the driver when a station starts/stops using
4146 * 4-address mode
4147 * @set_sar_specs: Update the SAR (TX power) settings.
4148 * @sta_set_decap_offload: Called to notify the driver when a station is allowed
4149 * to use rx decapsulation offload
4150 * @add_twt_setup: Update hw with TWT agreement parameters received from the peer.
4151 * This callback allows the hw to check if requested parameters
4152 * are supported and if there is enough room for a new agreement.
4153 * The hw is expected to set agreement result in the req_type field of
4154 * twt structure.
4155 * @twt_teardown_request: Update the hw with TWT teardown request received
4156 * from the peer.
4157 * @set_radar_background: Configure dedicated offchannel chain available for
4158 * radar/CAC detection on some hw. This chain can't be used to transmit
4159 * or receive frames and it is bounded to a running wdev.
4160 * Background radar/CAC detection allows to avoid the CAC downtime
4161 * switching to a different channel during CAC detection on the selected
4162 * radar channel.
4163 * The caller is expected to set chandef pointer to NULL in order to
4164 * disable background CAC/radar detection.
4165 * @net_fill_forward_path: Called from .ndo_fill_forward_path in order to
4166 * resolve a path for hardware flow offloading
4167 * @change_vif_links: Change the valid links on an interface, note that while
4168 * removing the old link information is still valid (link_conf pointer),
4169 * but may immediately disappear after the function returns. The old or
4170 * new links bitmaps may be 0 if going from/to a non-MLO situation.
4171 * The @old array contains pointers to the old bss_conf structures
4172 * that were already removed, in case they're needed.
4173 * This callback can sleep.
4174 * @change_sta_links: Change the valid links of a station, similar to
4175 * @change_vif_links. This callback can sleep.
4176 * Note that a sta can also be inserted or removed with valid links,
4177 * i.e. passed to @sta_add/@sta_state with sta->valid_links not zero.
4178 * In fact, cannot change from having valid_links and not having them.
4179 */
4180 struct ieee80211_ops {
4181 void (*tx)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4182 struct ieee80211_tx_control *control,
4183 struct sk_buff *skb);
4184 int (*start)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
4185 void (*stop)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
4186 #ifdef CONFIG_PM
4187 int (*suspend)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct cfg80211_wowlan *wowlan);
4188 int (*resume)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
4189 void (*set_wakeup)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, bool enabled);
4190 #endif
4191 int (*add_interface)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4192 struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
4193 int (*change_interface)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4194 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4195 enum nl80211_iftype new_type, bool p2p);
4196 void (*remove_interface)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4197 struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
4198 int (*config)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, u32 changed);
4199 void (*bss_info_changed)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4200 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4201 struct ieee80211_bss_conf *info,
4202 u64 changed);
4203 void (*vif_cfg_changed)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4204 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4205 u64 changed);
4206 void (*link_info_changed)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4207 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4208 struct ieee80211_bss_conf *info,
4209 u64 changed);
4210
4211 int (*start_ap)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4212 struct ieee80211_bss_conf *link_conf);
4213 void (*stop_ap)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4214 struct ieee80211_bss_conf *link_conf);
4215
4216 u64 (*prepare_multicast)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4217 struct netdev_hw_addr_list *mc_list);
4218 void (*configure_filter)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4219 unsigned int changed_flags,
4220 unsigned int *total_flags,
4221 u64 multicast);
4222 void (*config_iface_filter)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4223 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4224 unsigned int filter_flags,
4225 unsigned int changed_flags);
4226 int (*set_tim)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
4227 bool set);
4228 int (*set_key)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, enum set_key_cmd cmd,
4229 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
4230 struct ieee80211_key_conf *key);
4231 void (*update_tkip_key)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4232 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4233 struct ieee80211_key_conf *conf,
4234 struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
4235 u32 iv32, u16 *phase1key);
4236 void (*set_rekey_data)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4237 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4238 struct cfg80211_gtk_rekey_data *data);
4239 void (*set_default_unicast_key)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4240 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, int idx);
4241 int (*hw_scan)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4242 struct ieee80211_scan_request *req);
4243 void (*cancel_hw_scan)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4244 struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
4245 int (*sched_scan_start)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4246 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4247 struct cfg80211_sched_scan_request *req,
4248 struct ieee80211_scan_ies *ies);
4249 int (*sched_scan_stop)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4250 struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
4251 void (*sw_scan_start)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4252 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4253 const u8 *mac_addr);
4254 void (*sw_scan_complete)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4255 struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
4256 int (*get_stats)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4257 struct ieee80211_low_level_stats *stats);
4258 void (*get_key_seq)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4259 struct ieee80211_key_conf *key,
4260 struct ieee80211_key_seq *seq);
4261 int (*set_frag_threshold)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, u32 value);
4262 int (*set_rts_threshold)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, u32 value);
4263 int (*sta_add)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4264 struct ieee80211_sta *sta);
4265 int (*sta_remove)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4266 struct ieee80211_sta *sta);
4267 #ifdef CONFIG_MAC80211_DEBUGFS
4268 void (*sta_add_debugfs)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4269 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4270 struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
4271 struct dentry *dir);
4272 #endif
4273 void (*sta_notify)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4274 enum sta_notify_cmd, struct ieee80211_sta *sta);
4275 int (*sta_set_txpwr)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4276 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4277 struct ieee80211_sta *sta);
4278 int (*sta_state)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4279 struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
4280 enum ieee80211_sta_state old_state,
4281 enum ieee80211_sta_state new_state);
4282 void (*sta_pre_rcu_remove)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4283 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4284 struct ieee80211_sta *sta);
4285 void (*sta_rc_update)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4286 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4287 struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
4288 u32 changed);
4289 void (*sta_rate_tbl_update)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4290 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4291 struct ieee80211_sta *sta);
4292 void (*sta_statistics)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4293 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4294 struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
4295 struct station_info *sinfo);
4296 int (*conf_tx)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4297 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4298 unsigned int link_id, u16 ac,
4299 const struct ieee80211_tx_queue_params *params);
4300 u64 (*get_tsf)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
4301 void (*set_tsf)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4302 u64 tsf);
4303 void (*offset_tsf)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4304 s64 offset);
4305 void (*reset_tsf)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
4306 int (*tx_last_beacon)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
4307
4308 /**
4309 * @ampdu_action:
4310 * Perform a certain A-MPDU action.
4311 * The RA/TID combination determines the destination and TID we want
4312 * the ampdu action to be performed for. The action is defined through
4313 * ieee80211_ampdu_mlme_action.
4314 * When the action is set to %IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_OPERATIONAL the driver
4315 * may neither send aggregates containing more subframes than @buf_size
4316 * nor send aggregates in a way that lost frames would exceed the
4317 * buffer size. If just limiting the aggregate size, this would be
4318 * possible with a buf_size of 8:
4319 *
4320 * - ``TX: 1.....7``
4321 * - ``RX: 2....7`` (lost frame #1)
4322 * - ``TX: 8..1...``
4323 *
4324 * which is invalid since #1 was now re-transmitted well past the
4325 * buffer size of 8. Correct ways to retransmit #1 would be:
4326 *
4327 * - ``TX: 1 or``
4328 * - ``TX: 18 or``
4329 * - ``TX: 81``
4330 *
4331 * Even ``189`` would be wrong since 1 could be lost again.
4332 *
4333 * Returns a negative error code on failure. The driver may return
4334 * %IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_START_IMMEDIATE for %IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_START
4335 * if the session can start immediately.
4336 *
4337 * The callback can sleep.
4338 */
4339 int (*ampdu_action)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4340 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4341 struct ieee80211_ampdu_params *params);
4342 int (*get_survey)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, int idx,
4343 struct survey_info *survey);
4344 void (*rfkill_poll)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
4345 void (*set_coverage_class)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, s16 coverage_class);
4346 #ifdef CONFIG_NL80211_TESTMODE
4347 int (*testmode_cmd)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4348 void *data, int len);
4349 int (*testmode_dump)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct sk_buff *skb,
4350 struct netlink_callback *cb,
4351 void *data, int len);
4352 #endif
4353 void (*flush)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4354 u32 queues, bool drop);
4355 void (*channel_switch)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4356 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4357 struct ieee80211_channel_switch *ch_switch);
4358 int (*set_antenna)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, u32 tx_ant, u32 rx_ant);
4359 int (*get_antenna)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, u32 *tx_ant, u32 *rx_ant);
4360
4361 int (*remain_on_channel)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4362 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4363 struct ieee80211_channel *chan,
4364 int duration,
4365 enum ieee80211_roc_type type);
4366 int (*cancel_remain_on_channel)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4367 struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
4368 int (*set_ringparam)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, u32 tx, u32 rx);
4369 void (*get_ringparam)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4370 u32 *tx, u32 *tx_max, u32 *rx, u32 *rx_max);
4371 bool (*tx_frames_pending)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
4372 int (*set_bitrate_mask)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4373 const struct cfg80211_bitrate_mask *mask);
4374 void (*event_callback)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4375 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4376 const struct ieee80211_event *event);
4377
4378 void (*allow_buffered_frames)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4379 struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
4380 u16 tids, int num_frames,
4381 enum ieee80211_frame_release_type reason,
4382 bool more_data);
4383 void (*release_buffered_frames)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4384 struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
4385 u16 tids, int num_frames,
4386 enum ieee80211_frame_release_type reason,
4387 bool more_data);
4388
4389 int (*get_et_sset_count)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4390 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, int sset);
4391 void (*get_et_stats)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4392 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4393 struct ethtool_stats *stats, u64 *data);
4394 void (*get_et_strings)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4395 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4396 u32 sset, u8 *data);
4397
4398 void (*mgd_prepare_tx)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4399 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4400 struct ieee80211_prep_tx_info *info);
4401 void (*mgd_complete_tx)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4402 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4403 struct ieee80211_prep_tx_info *info);
4404
4405 void (*mgd_protect_tdls_discover)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4406 struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
4407
4408 int (*add_chanctx)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4409 struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf *ctx);
4410 void (*remove_chanctx)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4411 struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf *ctx);
4412 void (*change_chanctx)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4413 struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf *ctx,
4414 u32 changed);
4415 int (*assign_vif_chanctx)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4416 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4417 struct ieee80211_bss_conf *link_conf,
4418 struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf *ctx);
4419 void (*unassign_vif_chanctx)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4420 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4421 struct ieee80211_bss_conf *link_conf,
4422 struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf *ctx);
4423 int (*switch_vif_chanctx)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4424 struct ieee80211_vif_chanctx_switch *vifs,
4425 int n_vifs,
4426 enum ieee80211_chanctx_switch_mode mode);
4427
4428 void (*reconfig_complete)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4429 enum ieee80211_reconfig_type reconfig_type);
4430
4431 #if IS_ENABLED(CONFIG_IPV6)
4432 void (*ipv6_addr_change)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4433 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4434 struct inet6_dev *idev);
4435 #endif
4436 void (*channel_switch_beacon)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4437 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4438 struct cfg80211_chan_def *chandef);
4439 int (*pre_channel_switch)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4440 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4441 struct ieee80211_channel_switch *ch_switch);
4442
4443 int (*post_channel_switch)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4444 struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
4445 void (*abort_channel_switch)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4446 struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
4447 void (*channel_switch_rx_beacon)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4448 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4449 struct ieee80211_channel_switch *ch_switch);
4450
4451 int (*join_ibss)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
4452 void (*leave_ibss)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
4453 u32 (*get_expected_throughput)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4454 struct ieee80211_sta *sta);
4455 int (*get_txpower)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4456 int *dbm);
4457
4458 int (*tdls_channel_switch)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4459 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4460 struct ieee80211_sta *sta, u8 oper_class,
4461 struct cfg80211_chan_def *chandef,
4462 struct sk_buff *tmpl_skb, u32 ch_sw_tm_ie);
4463 void (*tdls_cancel_channel_switch)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4464 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4465 struct ieee80211_sta *sta);
4466 void (*tdls_recv_channel_switch)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4467 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4468 struct ieee80211_tdls_ch_sw_params *params);
4469
4470 void (*wake_tx_queue)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4471 struct ieee80211_txq *txq);
4472 void (*sync_rx_queues)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
4473
4474 int (*start_nan)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4475 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4476 struct cfg80211_nan_conf *conf);
4477 int (*stop_nan)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4478 struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
4479 int (*nan_change_conf)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4480 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4481 struct cfg80211_nan_conf *conf, u32 changes);
4482 int (*add_nan_func)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4483 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4484 const struct cfg80211_nan_func *nan_func);
4485 void (*del_nan_func)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4486 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4487 u8 instance_id);
4488 bool (*can_aggregate_in_amsdu)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4489 struct sk_buff *head,
4490 struct sk_buff *skb);
4491 int (*get_ftm_responder_stats)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4492 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4493 struct cfg80211_ftm_responder_stats *ftm_stats);
4494 int (*start_pmsr)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4495 struct cfg80211_pmsr_request *request);
4496 void (*abort_pmsr)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4497 struct cfg80211_pmsr_request *request);
4498 int (*set_tid_config)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4499 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4500 struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
4501 struct cfg80211_tid_config *tid_conf);
4502 int (*reset_tid_config)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4503 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4504 struct ieee80211_sta *sta, u8 tids);
4505 void (*update_vif_offload)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4506 struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
4507 void (*sta_set_4addr)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4508 struct ieee80211_sta *sta, bool enabled);
4509 int (*set_sar_specs)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4510 const struct cfg80211_sar_specs *sar);
4511 void (*sta_set_decap_offload)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4512 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4513 struct ieee80211_sta *sta, bool enabled);
4514 void (*add_twt_setup)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4515 struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
4516 struct ieee80211_twt_setup *twt);
4517 void (*twt_teardown_request)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4518 struct ieee80211_sta *sta, u8 flowid);
4519 int (*set_radar_background)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4520 struct cfg80211_chan_def *chandef);
4521 int (*net_fill_forward_path)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4522 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4523 struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
4524 struct net_device_path_ctx *ctx,
4525 struct net_device_path *path);
4526 int (*change_vif_links)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4527 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4528 u16 old_links, u16 new_links,
4529 struct ieee80211_bss_conf *old[IEEE80211_MLD_MAX_NUM_LINKS]);
4530 int (*change_sta_links)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4531 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4532 struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
4533 u16 old_links, u16 new_links);
4534
4535 ANDROID_KABI_RESERVE(1);
4536 ANDROID_KABI_RESERVE(2);
4537 ANDROID_KABI_RESERVE(3);
4538 ANDROID_KABI_RESERVE(4);
4539 };
4540
4541 /**
4542 * ieee80211_alloc_hw_nm - Allocate a new hardware device
4543 *
4544 * This must be called once for each hardware device. The returned pointer
4545 * must be used to refer to this device when calling other functions.
4546 * mac80211 allocates a private data area for the driver pointed to by
4547 * @priv in &struct ieee80211_hw, the size of this area is given as
4548 * @priv_data_len.
4549 *
4550 * @priv_data_len: length of private data
4551 * @ops: callbacks for this device
4552 * @requested_name: Requested name for this device.
4553 * NULL is valid value, and means use the default naming (phy%d)
4554 *
4555 * Return: A pointer to the new hardware device, or %NULL on error.
4556 */
4557 struct ieee80211_hw *ieee80211_alloc_hw_nm(size_t priv_data_len,
4558 const struct ieee80211_ops *ops,
4559 const char *requested_name);
4560
4561 /**
4562 * ieee80211_alloc_hw - Allocate a new hardware device
4563 *
4564 * This must be called once for each hardware device. The returned pointer
4565 * must be used to refer to this device when calling other functions.
4566 * mac80211 allocates a private data area for the driver pointed to by
4567 * @priv in &struct ieee80211_hw, the size of this area is given as
4568 * @priv_data_len.
4569 *
4570 * @priv_data_len: length of private data
4571 * @ops: callbacks for this device
4572 *
4573 * Return: A pointer to the new hardware device, or %NULL on error.
4574 */
4575 static inline
ieee80211_alloc_hw(size_t priv_data_len,const struct ieee80211_ops * ops)4576 struct ieee80211_hw *ieee80211_alloc_hw(size_t priv_data_len,
4577 const struct ieee80211_ops *ops)
4578 {
4579 return ieee80211_alloc_hw_nm(priv_data_len, ops, NULL);
4580 }
4581
4582 /**
4583 * ieee80211_register_hw - Register hardware device
4584 *
4585 * You must call this function before any other functions in
4586 * mac80211. Note that before a hardware can be registered, you
4587 * need to fill the contained wiphy's information.
4588 *
4589 * @hw: the device to register as returned by ieee80211_alloc_hw()
4590 *
4591 * Return: 0 on success. An error code otherwise.
4592 */
4593 int ieee80211_register_hw(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
4594
4595 /**
4596 * struct ieee80211_tpt_blink - throughput blink description
4597 * @throughput: throughput in Kbit/sec
4598 * @blink_time: blink time in milliseconds
4599 * (full cycle, ie. one off + one on period)
4600 */
4601 struct ieee80211_tpt_blink {
4602 int throughput;
4603 int blink_time;
4604 };
4605
4606 /**
4607 * enum ieee80211_tpt_led_trigger_flags - throughput trigger flags
4608 * @IEEE80211_TPT_LEDTRIG_FL_RADIO: enable blinking with radio
4609 * @IEEE80211_TPT_LEDTRIG_FL_WORK: enable blinking when working
4610 * @IEEE80211_TPT_LEDTRIG_FL_CONNECTED: enable blinking when at least one
4611 * interface is connected in some way, including being an AP
4612 */
4613 enum ieee80211_tpt_led_trigger_flags {
4614 IEEE80211_TPT_LEDTRIG_FL_RADIO = BIT(0),
4615 IEEE80211_TPT_LEDTRIG_FL_WORK = BIT(1),
4616 IEEE80211_TPT_LEDTRIG_FL_CONNECTED = BIT(2),
4617 };
4618
4619 #ifdef CONFIG_MAC80211_LEDS
4620 const char *__ieee80211_get_tx_led_name(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
4621 const char *__ieee80211_get_rx_led_name(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
4622 const char *__ieee80211_get_assoc_led_name(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
4623 const char *__ieee80211_get_radio_led_name(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
4624 const char *
4625 __ieee80211_create_tpt_led_trigger(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4626 unsigned int flags,
4627 const struct ieee80211_tpt_blink *blink_table,
4628 unsigned int blink_table_len);
4629 #endif
4630 /**
4631 * ieee80211_get_tx_led_name - get name of TX LED
4632 *
4633 * mac80211 creates a transmit LED trigger for each wireless hardware
4634 * that can be used to drive LEDs if your driver registers a LED device.
4635 * This function returns the name (or %NULL if not configured for LEDs)
4636 * of the trigger so you can automatically link the LED device.
4637 *
4638 * @hw: the hardware to get the LED trigger name for
4639 *
4640 * Return: The name of the LED trigger. %NULL if not configured for LEDs.
4641 */
ieee80211_get_tx_led_name(struct ieee80211_hw * hw)4642 static inline const char *ieee80211_get_tx_led_name(struct ieee80211_hw *hw)
4643 {
4644 #ifdef CONFIG_MAC80211_LEDS
4645 return __ieee80211_get_tx_led_name(hw);
4646 #else
4647 return NULL;
4648 #endif
4649 }
4650
4651 /**
4652 * ieee80211_get_rx_led_name - get name of RX LED
4653 *
4654 * mac80211 creates a receive LED trigger for each wireless hardware
4655 * that can be used to drive LEDs if your driver registers a LED device.
4656 * This function returns the name (or %NULL if not configured for LEDs)
4657 * of the trigger so you can automatically link the LED device.
4658 *
4659 * @hw: the hardware to get the LED trigger name for
4660 *
4661 * Return: The name of the LED trigger. %NULL if not configured for LEDs.
4662 */
ieee80211_get_rx_led_name(struct ieee80211_hw * hw)4663 static inline const char *ieee80211_get_rx_led_name(struct ieee80211_hw *hw)
4664 {
4665 #ifdef CONFIG_MAC80211_LEDS
4666 return __ieee80211_get_rx_led_name(hw);
4667 #else
4668 return NULL;
4669 #endif
4670 }
4671
4672 /**
4673 * ieee80211_get_assoc_led_name - get name of association LED
4674 *
4675 * mac80211 creates a association LED trigger for each wireless hardware
4676 * that can be used to drive LEDs if your driver registers a LED device.
4677 * This function returns the name (or %NULL if not configured for LEDs)
4678 * of the trigger so you can automatically link the LED device.
4679 *
4680 * @hw: the hardware to get the LED trigger name for
4681 *
4682 * Return: The name of the LED trigger. %NULL if not configured for LEDs.
4683 */
ieee80211_get_assoc_led_name(struct ieee80211_hw * hw)4684 static inline const char *ieee80211_get_assoc_led_name(struct ieee80211_hw *hw)
4685 {
4686 #ifdef CONFIG_MAC80211_LEDS
4687 return __ieee80211_get_assoc_led_name(hw);
4688 #else
4689 return NULL;
4690 #endif
4691 }
4692
4693 /**
4694 * ieee80211_get_radio_led_name - get name of radio LED
4695 *
4696 * mac80211 creates a radio change LED trigger for each wireless hardware
4697 * that can be used to drive LEDs if your driver registers a LED device.
4698 * This function returns the name (or %NULL if not configured for LEDs)
4699 * of the trigger so you can automatically link the LED device.
4700 *
4701 * @hw: the hardware to get the LED trigger name for
4702 *
4703 * Return: The name of the LED trigger. %NULL if not configured for LEDs.
4704 */
ieee80211_get_radio_led_name(struct ieee80211_hw * hw)4705 static inline const char *ieee80211_get_radio_led_name(struct ieee80211_hw *hw)
4706 {
4707 #ifdef CONFIG_MAC80211_LEDS
4708 return __ieee80211_get_radio_led_name(hw);
4709 #else
4710 return NULL;
4711 #endif
4712 }
4713
4714 /**
4715 * ieee80211_create_tpt_led_trigger - create throughput LED trigger
4716 * @hw: the hardware to create the trigger for
4717 * @flags: trigger flags, see &enum ieee80211_tpt_led_trigger_flags
4718 * @blink_table: the blink table -- needs to be ordered by throughput
4719 * @blink_table_len: size of the blink table
4720 *
4721 * Return: %NULL (in case of error, or if no LED triggers are
4722 * configured) or the name of the new trigger.
4723 *
4724 * Note: This function must be called before ieee80211_register_hw().
4725 */
4726 static inline const char *
ieee80211_create_tpt_led_trigger(struct ieee80211_hw * hw,unsigned int flags,const struct ieee80211_tpt_blink * blink_table,unsigned int blink_table_len)4727 ieee80211_create_tpt_led_trigger(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, unsigned int flags,
4728 const struct ieee80211_tpt_blink *blink_table,
4729 unsigned int blink_table_len)
4730 {
4731 #ifdef CONFIG_MAC80211_LEDS
4732 return __ieee80211_create_tpt_led_trigger(hw, flags, blink_table,
4733 blink_table_len);
4734 #else
4735 return NULL;
4736 #endif
4737 }
4738
4739 /**
4740 * ieee80211_unregister_hw - Unregister a hardware device
4741 *
4742 * This function instructs mac80211 to free allocated resources
4743 * and unregister netdevices from the networking subsystem.
4744 *
4745 * @hw: the hardware to unregister
4746 */
4747 void ieee80211_unregister_hw(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
4748
4749 /**
4750 * ieee80211_free_hw - free hardware descriptor
4751 *
4752 * This function frees everything that was allocated, including the
4753 * private data for the driver. You must call ieee80211_unregister_hw()
4754 * before calling this function.
4755 *
4756 * @hw: the hardware to free
4757 */
4758 void ieee80211_free_hw(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
4759
4760 /**
4761 * ieee80211_restart_hw - restart hardware completely
4762 *
4763 * Call this function when the hardware was restarted for some reason
4764 * (hardware error, ...) and the driver is unable to restore its state
4765 * by itself. mac80211 assumes that at this point the driver/hardware
4766 * is completely uninitialised and stopped, it starts the process by
4767 * calling the ->start() operation. The driver will need to reset all
4768 * internal state that it has prior to calling this function.
4769 *
4770 * @hw: the hardware to restart
4771 */
4772 void ieee80211_restart_hw(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
4773
4774 /**
4775 * ieee80211_rx_list - receive frame and store processed skbs in a list
4776 *
4777 * Use this function to hand received frames to mac80211. The receive
4778 * buffer in @skb must start with an IEEE 802.11 header. In case of a
4779 * paged @skb is used, the driver is recommended to put the ieee80211
4780 * header of the frame on the linear part of the @skb to avoid memory
4781 * allocation and/or memcpy by the stack.
4782 *
4783 * This function may not be called in IRQ context. Calls to this function
4784 * for a single hardware must be synchronized against each other. Calls to
4785 * this function, ieee80211_rx_ni() and ieee80211_rx_irqsafe() may not be
4786 * mixed for a single hardware. Must not run concurrently with
4787 * ieee80211_tx_status() or ieee80211_tx_status_ni().
4788 *
4789 * This function must be called with BHs disabled and RCU read lock
4790 *
4791 * @hw: the hardware this frame came in on
4792 * @sta: the station the frame was received from, or %NULL
4793 * @skb: the buffer to receive, owned by mac80211 after this call
4794 * @list: the destination list
4795 */
4796 void ieee80211_rx_list(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
4797 struct sk_buff *skb, struct list_head *list);
4798
4799 /**
4800 * ieee80211_rx_napi - receive frame from NAPI context
4801 *
4802 * Use this function to hand received frames to mac80211. The receive
4803 * buffer in @skb must start with an IEEE 802.11 header. In case of a
4804 * paged @skb is used, the driver is recommended to put the ieee80211
4805 * header of the frame on the linear part of the @skb to avoid memory
4806 * allocation and/or memcpy by the stack.
4807 *
4808 * This function may not be called in IRQ context. Calls to this function
4809 * for a single hardware must be synchronized against each other. Calls to
4810 * this function, ieee80211_rx_ni() and ieee80211_rx_irqsafe() may not be
4811 * mixed for a single hardware. Must not run concurrently with
4812 * ieee80211_tx_status() or ieee80211_tx_status_ni().
4813 *
4814 * This function must be called with BHs disabled.
4815 *
4816 * @hw: the hardware this frame came in on
4817 * @sta: the station the frame was received from, or %NULL
4818 * @skb: the buffer to receive, owned by mac80211 after this call
4819 * @napi: the NAPI context
4820 */
4821 void ieee80211_rx_napi(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
4822 struct sk_buff *skb, struct napi_struct *napi);
4823
4824 /**
4825 * ieee80211_rx - receive frame
4826 *
4827 * Use this function to hand received frames to mac80211. The receive
4828 * buffer in @skb must start with an IEEE 802.11 header. In case of a
4829 * paged @skb is used, the driver is recommended to put the ieee80211
4830 * header of the frame on the linear part of the @skb to avoid memory
4831 * allocation and/or memcpy by the stack.
4832 *
4833 * This function may not be called in IRQ context. Calls to this function
4834 * for a single hardware must be synchronized against each other. Calls to
4835 * this function, ieee80211_rx_ni() and ieee80211_rx_irqsafe() may not be
4836 * mixed for a single hardware. Must not run concurrently with
4837 * ieee80211_tx_status() or ieee80211_tx_status_ni().
4838 *
4839 * In process context use instead ieee80211_rx_ni().
4840 *
4841 * @hw: the hardware this frame came in on
4842 * @skb: the buffer to receive, owned by mac80211 after this call
4843 */
ieee80211_rx(struct ieee80211_hw * hw,struct sk_buff * skb)4844 static inline void ieee80211_rx(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct sk_buff *skb)
4845 {
4846 ieee80211_rx_napi(hw, NULL, skb, NULL);
4847 }
4848
4849 /**
4850 * ieee80211_rx_irqsafe - receive frame
4851 *
4852 * Like ieee80211_rx() but can be called in IRQ context
4853 * (internally defers to a tasklet.)
4854 *
4855 * Calls to this function, ieee80211_rx() or ieee80211_rx_ni() may not
4856 * be mixed for a single hardware.Must not run concurrently with
4857 * ieee80211_tx_status() or ieee80211_tx_status_ni().
4858 *
4859 * @hw: the hardware this frame came in on
4860 * @skb: the buffer to receive, owned by mac80211 after this call
4861 */
4862 void ieee80211_rx_irqsafe(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct sk_buff *skb);
4863
4864 /**
4865 * ieee80211_rx_ni - receive frame (in process context)
4866 *
4867 * Like ieee80211_rx() but can be called in process context
4868 * (internally disables bottom halves).
4869 *
4870 * Calls to this function, ieee80211_rx() and ieee80211_rx_irqsafe() may
4871 * not be mixed for a single hardware. Must not run concurrently with
4872 * ieee80211_tx_status() or ieee80211_tx_status_ni().
4873 *
4874 * @hw: the hardware this frame came in on
4875 * @skb: the buffer to receive, owned by mac80211 after this call
4876 */
ieee80211_rx_ni(struct ieee80211_hw * hw,struct sk_buff * skb)4877 static inline void ieee80211_rx_ni(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4878 struct sk_buff *skb)
4879 {
4880 local_bh_disable();
4881 ieee80211_rx(hw, skb);
4882 local_bh_enable();
4883 }
4884
4885 /**
4886 * ieee80211_sta_ps_transition - PS transition for connected sta
4887 *
4888 * When operating in AP mode with the %IEEE80211_HW_AP_LINK_PS
4889 * flag set, use this function to inform mac80211 about a connected station
4890 * entering/leaving PS mode.
4891 *
4892 * This function may not be called in IRQ context or with softirqs enabled.
4893 *
4894 * Calls to this function for a single hardware must be synchronized against
4895 * each other.
4896 *
4897 * @sta: currently connected sta
4898 * @start: start or stop PS
4899 *
4900 * Return: 0 on success. -EINVAL when the requested PS mode is already set.
4901 */
4902 int ieee80211_sta_ps_transition(struct ieee80211_sta *sta, bool start);
4903
4904 /**
4905 * ieee80211_sta_ps_transition_ni - PS transition for connected sta
4906 * (in process context)
4907 *
4908 * Like ieee80211_sta_ps_transition() but can be called in process context
4909 * (internally disables bottom halves). Concurrent call restriction still
4910 * applies.
4911 *
4912 * @sta: currently connected sta
4913 * @start: start or stop PS
4914 *
4915 * Return: Like ieee80211_sta_ps_transition().
4916 */
ieee80211_sta_ps_transition_ni(struct ieee80211_sta * sta,bool start)4917 static inline int ieee80211_sta_ps_transition_ni(struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
4918 bool start)
4919 {
4920 int ret;
4921
4922 local_bh_disable();
4923 ret = ieee80211_sta_ps_transition(sta, start);
4924 local_bh_enable();
4925
4926 return ret;
4927 }
4928
4929 /**
4930 * ieee80211_sta_pspoll - PS-Poll frame received
4931 * @sta: currently connected station
4932 *
4933 * When operating in AP mode with the %IEEE80211_HW_AP_LINK_PS flag set,
4934 * use this function to inform mac80211 that a PS-Poll frame from a
4935 * connected station was received.
4936 * This must be used in conjunction with ieee80211_sta_ps_transition()
4937 * and possibly ieee80211_sta_uapsd_trigger(); calls to all three must
4938 * be serialized.
4939 */
4940 void ieee80211_sta_pspoll(struct ieee80211_sta *sta);
4941
4942 /**
4943 * ieee80211_sta_uapsd_trigger - (potential) U-APSD trigger frame received
4944 * @sta: currently connected station
4945 * @tid: TID of the received (potential) trigger frame
4946 *
4947 * When operating in AP mode with the %IEEE80211_HW_AP_LINK_PS flag set,
4948 * use this function to inform mac80211 that a (potential) trigger frame
4949 * from a connected station was received.
4950 * This must be used in conjunction with ieee80211_sta_ps_transition()
4951 * and possibly ieee80211_sta_pspoll(); calls to all three must be
4952 * serialized.
4953 * %IEEE80211_NUM_TIDS can be passed as the tid if the tid is unknown.
4954 * In this case, mac80211 will not check that this tid maps to an AC
4955 * that is trigger enabled and assume that the caller did the proper
4956 * checks.
4957 */
4958 void ieee80211_sta_uapsd_trigger(struct ieee80211_sta *sta, u8 tid);
4959
4960 /*
4961 * The TX headroom reserved by mac80211 for its own tx_status functions.
4962 * This is enough for the radiotap header.
4963 */
4964 #define IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_HEADROOM ALIGN(14, 4)
4965
4966 /**
4967 * ieee80211_sta_set_buffered - inform mac80211 about driver-buffered frames
4968 * @sta: &struct ieee80211_sta pointer for the sleeping station
4969 * @tid: the TID that has buffered frames
4970 * @buffered: indicates whether or not frames are buffered for this TID
4971 *
4972 * If a driver buffers frames for a powersave station instead of passing
4973 * them back to mac80211 for retransmission, the station may still need
4974 * to be told that there are buffered frames via the TIM bit.
4975 *
4976 * This function informs mac80211 whether or not there are frames that are
4977 * buffered in the driver for a given TID; mac80211 can then use this data
4978 * to set the TIM bit (NOTE: This may call back into the driver's set_tim
4979 * call! Beware of the locking!)
4980 *
4981 * If all frames are released to the station (due to PS-poll or uAPSD)
4982 * then the driver needs to inform mac80211 that there no longer are
4983 * frames buffered. However, when the station wakes up mac80211 assumes
4984 * that all buffered frames will be transmitted and clears this data,
4985 * drivers need to make sure they inform mac80211 about all buffered
4986 * frames on the sleep transition (sta_notify() with %STA_NOTIFY_SLEEP).
4987 *
4988 * Note that technically mac80211 only needs to know this per AC, not per
4989 * TID, but since driver buffering will inevitably happen per TID (since
4990 * it is related to aggregation) it is easier to make mac80211 map the
4991 * TID to the AC as required instead of keeping track in all drivers that
4992 * use this API.
4993 */
4994 void ieee80211_sta_set_buffered(struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
4995 u8 tid, bool buffered);
4996
4997 /**
4998 * ieee80211_get_tx_rates - get the selected transmit rates for a packet
4999 *
5000 * Call this function in a driver with per-packet rate selection support
5001 * to combine the rate info in the packet tx info with the most recent
5002 * rate selection table for the station entry.
5003 *
5004 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
5005 * @sta: the receiver station to which this packet is sent.
5006 * @skb: the frame to be transmitted.
5007 * @dest: buffer for extracted rate/retry information
5008 * @max_rates: maximum number of rates to fetch
5009 */
5010 void ieee80211_get_tx_rates(struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
5011 struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
5012 struct sk_buff *skb,
5013 struct ieee80211_tx_rate *dest,
5014 int max_rates);
5015
5016 /**
5017 * ieee80211_sta_set_expected_throughput - set the expected tpt for a station
5018 *
5019 * Call this function to notify mac80211 about a change in expected throughput
5020 * to a station. A driver for a device that does rate control in firmware can
5021 * call this function when the expected throughput estimate towards a station
5022 * changes. The information is used to tune the CoDel AQM applied to traffic
5023 * going towards that station (which can otherwise be too aggressive and cause
5024 * slow stations to starve).
5025 *
5026 * @pubsta: the station to set throughput for.
5027 * @thr: the current expected throughput in kbps.
5028 */
5029 void ieee80211_sta_set_expected_throughput(struct ieee80211_sta *pubsta,
5030 u32 thr);
5031
5032 /**
5033 * ieee80211_tx_rate_update - transmit rate update callback
5034 *
5035 * Drivers should call this functions with a non-NULL pub sta
5036 * This function can be used in drivers that does not have provision
5037 * in updating the tx rate in data path.
5038 *
5039 * @hw: the hardware the frame was transmitted by
5040 * @pubsta: the station to update the tx rate for.
5041 * @info: tx status information
5042 */
5043 void ieee80211_tx_rate_update(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
5044 struct ieee80211_sta *pubsta,
5045 struct ieee80211_tx_info *info);
5046
5047 /**
5048 * ieee80211_tx_status - transmit status callback
5049 *
5050 * Call this function for all transmitted frames after they have been
5051 * transmitted. It is permissible to not call this function for
5052 * multicast frames but this can affect statistics.
5053 *
5054 * This function may not be called in IRQ context. Calls to this function
5055 * for a single hardware must be synchronized against each other. Calls
5056 * to this function, ieee80211_tx_status_ni() and ieee80211_tx_status_irqsafe()
5057 * may not be mixed for a single hardware. Must not run concurrently with
5058 * ieee80211_rx() or ieee80211_rx_ni().
5059 *
5060 * @hw: the hardware the frame was transmitted by
5061 * @skb: the frame that was transmitted, owned by mac80211 after this call
5062 */
5063 void ieee80211_tx_status(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
5064 struct sk_buff *skb);
5065
5066 /**
5067 * ieee80211_tx_status_ext - extended transmit status callback
5068 *
5069 * This function can be used as a replacement for ieee80211_tx_status
5070 * in drivers that may want to provide extra information that does not
5071 * fit into &struct ieee80211_tx_info.
5072 *
5073 * Calls to this function for a single hardware must be synchronized
5074 * against each other. Calls to this function, ieee80211_tx_status_ni()
5075 * and ieee80211_tx_status_irqsafe() may not be mixed for a single hardware.
5076 *
5077 * @hw: the hardware the frame was transmitted by
5078 * @status: tx status information
5079 */
5080 void ieee80211_tx_status_ext(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
5081 struct ieee80211_tx_status *status);
5082
5083 /**
5084 * ieee80211_tx_status_noskb - transmit status callback without skb
5085 *
5086 * This function can be used as a replacement for ieee80211_tx_status
5087 * in drivers that cannot reliably map tx status information back to
5088 * specific skbs.
5089 *
5090 * Calls to this function for a single hardware must be synchronized
5091 * against each other. Calls to this function, ieee80211_tx_status_ni()
5092 * and ieee80211_tx_status_irqsafe() may not be mixed for a single hardware.
5093 *
5094 * @hw: the hardware the frame was transmitted by
5095 * @sta: the receiver station to which this packet is sent
5096 * (NULL for multicast packets)
5097 * @info: tx status information
5098 */
ieee80211_tx_status_noskb(struct ieee80211_hw * hw,struct ieee80211_sta * sta,struct ieee80211_tx_info * info)5099 static inline void ieee80211_tx_status_noskb(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
5100 struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
5101 struct ieee80211_tx_info *info)
5102 {
5103 struct ieee80211_tx_status status = {
5104 .sta = sta,
5105 .info = info,
5106 };
5107
5108 ieee80211_tx_status_ext(hw, &status);
5109 }
5110
5111 /**
5112 * ieee80211_tx_status_ni - transmit status callback (in process context)
5113 *
5114 * Like ieee80211_tx_status() but can be called in process context.
5115 *
5116 * Calls to this function, ieee80211_tx_status() and
5117 * ieee80211_tx_status_irqsafe() may not be mixed
5118 * for a single hardware.
5119 *
5120 * @hw: the hardware the frame was transmitted by
5121 * @skb: the frame that was transmitted, owned by mac80211 after this call
5122 */
ieee80211_tx_status_ni(struct ieee80211_hw * hw,struct sk_buff * skb)5123 static inline void ieee80211_tx_status_ni(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
5124 struct sk_buff *skb)
5125 {
5126 local_bh_disable();
5127 ieee80211_tx_status(hw, skb);
5128 local_bh_enable();
5129 }
5130
5131 /**
5132 * ieee80211_tx_status_irqsafe - IRQ-safe transmit status callback
5133 *
5134 * Like ieee80211_tx_status() but can be called in IRQ context
5135 * (internally defers to a tasklet.)
5136 *
5137 * Calls to this function, ieee80211_tx_status() and
5138 * ieee80211_tx_status_ni() may not be mixed for a single hardware.
5139 *
5140 * @hw: the hardware the frame was transmitted by
5141 * @skb: the frame that was transmitted, owned by mac80211 after this call
5142 */
5143 void ieee80211_tx_status_irqsafe(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
5144 struct sk_buff *skb);
5145
5146 /**
5147 * ieee80211_tx_status_8023 - transmit status callback for 802.3 frame format
5148 *
5149 * Call this function for all transmitted data frames after their transmit
5150 * completion. This callback should only be called for data frames which
5151 * are using driver's (or hardware's) offload capability of encap/decap
5152 * 802.11 frames.
5153 *
5154 * This function may not be called in IRQ context. Calls to this function
5155 * for a single hardware must be synchronized against each other and all
5156 * calls in the same tx status family.
5157 *
5158 * @hw: the hardware the frame was transmitted by
5159 * @vif: the interface for which the frame was transmitted
5160 * @skb: the frame that was transmitted, owned by mac80211 after this call
5161 */
5162 void ieee80211_tx_status_8023(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
5163 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
5164 struct sk_buff *skb);
5165
5166 /**
5167 * ieee80211_report_low_ack - report non-responding station
5168 *
5169 * When operating in AP-mode, call this function to report a non-responding
5170 * connected STA.
5171 *
5172 * @sta: the non-responding connected sta
5173 * @num_packets: number of packets sent to @sta without a response
5174 */
5175 void ieee80211_report_low_ack(struct ieee80211_sta *sta, u32 num_packets);
5176
5177 #define IEEE80211_MAX_CNTDWN_COUNTERS_NUM 2
5178
5179 /**
5180 * struct ieee80211_mutable_offsets - mutable beacon offsets
5181 * @tim_offset: position of TIM element
5182 * @tim_length: size of TIM element
5183 * @cntdwn_counter_offs: array of IEEE80211_MAX_CNTDWN_COUNTERS_NUM offsets
5184 * to countdown counters. This array can contain zero values which
5185 * should be ignored.
5186 * @mbssid_off: position of the multiple bssid element
5187 */
5188 struct ieee80211_mutable_offsets {
5189 u16 tim_offset;
5190 u16 tim_length;
5191
5192 u16 cntdwn_counter_offs[IEEE80211_MAX_CNTDWN_COUNTERS_NUM];
5193 u16 mbssid_off;
5194 };
5195
5196 /**
5197 * ieee80211_beacon_get_template - beacon template generation function
5198 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
5199 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
5200 * @offs: &struct ieee80211_mutable_offsets pointer to struct that will
5201 * receive the offsets that may be updated by the driver.
5202 * @link_id: the link id to which the beacon belongs (or 0 for a non-MLD AP)
5203 *
5204 * If the driver implements beaconing modes, it must use this function to
5205 * obtain the beacon template.
5206 *
5207 * This function should be used if the beacon frames are generated by the
5208 * device, and then the driver must use the returned beacon as the template
5209 * The driver or the device are responsible to update the DTIM and, when
5210 * applicable, the CSA count.
5211 *
5212 * The driver is responsible for freeing the returned skb.
5213 *
5214 * Return: The beacon template. %NULL on error.
5215 */
5216 struct sk_buff *
5217 ieee80211_beacon_get_template(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
5218 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
5219 struct ieee80211_mutable_offsets *offs,
5220 unsigned int link_id);
5221
5222 /**
5223 * ieee80211_beacon_get_tim - beacon generation function
5224 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
5225 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
5226 * @tim_offset: pointer to variable that will receive the TIM IE offset.
5227 * Set to 0 if invalid (in non-AP modes).
5228 * @tim_length: pointer to variable that will receive the TIM IE length,
5229 * (including the ID and length bytes!).
5230 * Set to 0 if invalid (in non-AP modes).
5231 * @link_id: the link id to which the beacon belongs (or 0 for a non-MLD AP)
5232 *
5233 * If the driver implements beaconing modes, it must use this function to
5234 * obtain the beacon frame.
5235 *
5236 * If the beacon frames are generated by the host system (i.e., not in
5237 * hardware/firmware), the driver uses this function to get each beacon
5238 * frame from mac80211 -- it is responsible for calling this function exactly
5239 * once before the beacon is needed (e.g. based on hardware interrupt).
5240 *
5241 * The driver is responsible for freeing the returned skb.
5242 *
5243 * Return: The beacon template. %NULL on error.
5244 */
5245 struct sk_buff *ieee80211_beacon_get_tim(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
5246 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
5247 u16 *tim_offset, u16 *tim_length,
5248 unsigned int link_id);
5249
5250 /**
5251 * ieee80211_beacon_get - beacon generation function
5252 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
5253 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
5254 * @link_id: the link id to which the beacon belongs (or 0 for a non-MLD AP)
5255 *
5256 * See ieee80211_beacon_get_tim().
5257 *
5258 * Return: See ieee80211_beacon_get_tim().
5259 */
ieee80211_beacon_get(struct ieee80211_hw * hw,struct ieee80211_vif * vif,unsigned int link_id)5260 static inline struct sk_buff *ieee80211_beacon_get(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
5261 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
5262 unsigned int link_id)
5263 {
5264 return ieee80211_beacon_get_tim(hw, vif, NULL, NULL, link_id);
5265 }
5266
5267 /**
5268 * ieee80211_beacon_update_cntdwn - request mac80211 to decrement the beacon countdown
5269 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
5270 *
5271 * The beacon counter should be updated after each beacon transmission.
5272 * This function is called implicitly when
5273 * ieee80211_beacon_get/ieee80211_beacon_get_tim are called, however if the
5274 * beacon frames are generated by the device, the driver should call this
5275 * function after each beacon transmission to sync mac80211's beacon countdown.
5276 *
5277 * Return: new countdown value
5278 */
5279 u8 ieee80211_beacon_update_cntdwn(struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
5280
5281 /**
5282 * ieee80211_beacon_set_cntdwn - request mac80211 to set beacon countdown
5283 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
5284 * @counter: the new value for the counter
5285 *
5286 * The beacon countdown can be changed by the device, this API should be
5287 * used by the device driver to update csa counter in mac80211.
5288 *
5289 * It should never be used together with ieee80211_beacon_update_cntdwn(),
5290 * as it will cause a race condition around the counter value.
5291 */
5292 void ieee80211_beacon_set_cntdwn(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, u8 counter);
5293
5294 /**
5295 * ieee80211_csa_finish - notify mac80211 about channel switch
5296 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
5297 *
5298 * After a channel switch announcement was scheduled and the counter in this
5299 * announcement hits 1, this function must be called by the driver to
5300 * notify mac80211 that the channel can be changed.
5301 */
5302 void ieee80211_csa_finish(struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
5303
5304 /**
5305 * ieee80211_beacon_cntdwn_is_complete - find out if countdown reached 1
5306 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
5307 *
5308 * This function returns whether the countdown reached zero.
5309 */
5310 bool ieee80211_beacon_cntdwn_is_complete(struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
5311
5312 /**
5313 * ieee80211_color_change_finish - notify mac80211 about color change
5314 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
5315 *
5316 * After a color change announcement was scheduled and the counter in this
5317 * announcement hits 1, this function must be called by the driver to
5318 * notify mac80211 that the color can be changed
5319 */
5320 void ieee80211_color_change_finish(struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
5321
5322 /**
5323 * ieee80211_proberesp_get - retrieve a Probe Response template
5324 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
5325 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
5326 *
5327 * Creates a Probe Response template which can, for example, be uploaded to
5328 * hardware. The destination address should be set by the caller.
5329 *
5330 * Can only be called in AP mode.
5331 *
5332 * Return: The Probe Response template. %NULL on error.
5333 */
5334 struct sk_buff *ieee80211_proberesp_get(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
5335 struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
5336
5337 /**
5338 * ieee80211_pspoll_get - retrieve a PS Poll template
5339 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
5340 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
5341 *
5342 * Creates a PS Poll a template which can, for example, uploaded to
5343 * hardware. The template must be updated after association so that correct
5344 * AID, BSSID and MAC address is used.
5345 *
5346 * Note: Caller (or hardware) is responsible for setting the
5347 * &IEEE80211_FCTL_PM bit.
5348 *
5349 * Return: The PS Poll template. %NULL on error.
5350 */
5351 struct sk_buff *ieee80211_pspoll_get(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
5352 struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
5353
5354 /**
5355 * ieee80211_nullfunc_get - retrieve a nullfunc template
5356 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
5357 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
5358 * @link_id: If the vif is an MLD, get a frame with the link addresses
5359 * for the given link ID. For a link_id < 0 you get a frame with
5360 * MLD addresses, however useful that might be.
5361 * @qos_ok: QoS NDP is acceptable to the caller, this should be set
5362 * if at all possible
5363 *
5364 * Creates a Nullfunc template which can, for example, uploaded to
5365 * hardware. The template must be updated after association so that correct
5366 * BSSID and address is used.
5367 *
5368 * If @qos_ndp is set and the association is to an AP with QoS/WMM, the
5369 * returned packet will be QoS NDP.
5370 *
5371 * Note: Caller (or hardware) is responsible for setting the
5372 * &IEEE80211_FCTL_PM bit as well as Duration and Sequence Control fields.
5373 *
5374 * Return: The nullfunc template. %NULL on error.
5375 */
5376 struct sk_buff *ieee80211_nullfunc_get(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
5377 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
5378 int link_id, bool qos_ok);
5379
5380 /**
5381 * ieee80211_probereq_get - retrieve a Probe Request template
5382 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
5383 * @src_addr: source MAC address
5384 * @ssid: SSID buffer
5385 * @ssid_len: length of SSID
5386 * @tailroom: tailroom to reserve at end of SKB for IEs
5387 *
5388 * Creates a Probe Request template which can, for example, be uploaded to
5389 * hardware.
5390 *
5391 * Return: The Probe Request template. %NULL on error.
5392 */
5393 struct sk_buff *ieee80211_probereq_get(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
5394 const u8 *src_addr,
5395 const u8 *ssid, size_t ssid_len,
5396 size_t tailroom);
5397
5398 /**
5399 * ieee80211_rts_get - RTS frame generation function
5400 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
5401 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
5402 * @frame: pointer to the frame that is going to be protected by the RTS.
5403 * @frame_len: the frame length (in octets).
5404 * @frame_txctl: &struct ieee80211_tx_info of the frame.
5405 * @rts: The buffer where to store the RTS frame.
5406 *
5407 * If the RTS frames are generated by the host system (i.e., not in
5408 * hardware/firmware), the low-level driver uses this function to receive
5409 * the next RTS frame from the 802.11 code. The low-level is responsible
5410 * for calling this function before and RTS frame is needed.
5411 */
5412 void ieee80211_rts_get(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
5413 const void *frame, size_t frame_len,
5414 const struct ieee80211_tx_info *frame_txctl,
5415 struct ieee80211_rts *rts);
5416
5417 /**
5418 * ieee80211_rts_duration - Get the duration field for an RTS frame
5419 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
5420 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
5421 * @frame_len: the length of the frame that is going to be protected by the RTS.
5422 * @frame_txctl: &struct ieee80211_tx_info of the frame.
5423 *
5424 * If the RTS is generated in firmware, but the host system must provide
5425 * the duration field, the low-level driver uses this function to receive
5426 * the duration field value in little-endian byteorder.
5427 *
5428 * Return: The duration.
5429 */
5430 __le16 ieee80211_rts_duration(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
5431 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, size_t frame_len,
5432 const struct ieee80211_tx_info *frame_txctl);
5433
5434 /**
5435 * ieee80211_ctstoself_get - CTS-to-self frame generation function
5436 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
5437 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
5438 * @frame: pointer to the frame that is going to be protected by the CTS-to-self.
5439 * @frame_len: the frame length (in octets).
5440 * @frame_txctl: &struct ieee80211_tx_info of the frame.
5441 * @cts: The buffer where to store the CTS-to-self frame.
5442 *
5443 * If the CTS-to-self frames are generated by the host system (i.e., not in
5444 * hardware/firmware), the low-level driver uses this function to receive
5445 * the next CTS-to-self frame from the 802.11 code. The low-level is responsible
5446 * for calling this function before and CTS-to-self frame is needed.
5447 */
5448 void ieee80211_ctstoself_get(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
5449 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
5450 const void *frame, size_t frame_len,
5451 const struct ieee80211_tx_info *frame_txctl,
5452 struct ieee80211_cts *cts);
5453
5454 /**
5455 * ieee80211_ctstoself_duration - Get the duration field for a CTS-to-self frame
5456 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
5457 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
5458 * @frame_len: the length of the frame that is going to be protected by the CTS-to-self.
5459 * @frame_txctl: &struct ieee80211_tx_info of the frame.
5460 *
5461 * If the CTS-to-self is generated in firmware, but the host system must provide
5462 * the duration field, the low-level driver uses this function to receive
5463 * the duration field value in little-endian byteorder.
5464 *
5465 * Return: The duration.
5466 */
5467 __le16 ieee80211_ctstoself_duration(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
5468 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
5469 size_t frame_len,
5470 const struct ieee80211_tx_info *frame_txctl);
5471
5472 /**
5473 * ieee80211_generic_frame_duration - Calculate the duration field for a frame
5474 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
5475 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
5476 * @band: the band to calculate the frame duration on
5477 * @frame_len: the length of the frame.
5478 * @rate: the rate at which the frame is going to be transmitted.
5479 *
5480 * Calculate the duration field of some generic frame, given its
5481 * length and transmission rate (in 100kbps).
5482 *
5483 * Return: The duration.
5484 */
5485 __le16 ieee80211_generic_frame_duration(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
5486 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
5487 enum nl80211_band band,
5488 size_t frame_len,
5489 struct ieee80211_rate *rate);
5490
5491 /**
5492 * ieee80211_get_buffered_bc - accessing buffered broadcast and multicast frames
5493 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
5494 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
5495 *
5496 * Function for accessing buffered broadcast and multicast frames. If
5497 * hardware/firmware does not implement buffering of broadcast/multicast
5498 * frames when power saving is used, 802.11 code buffers them in the host
5499 * memory. The low-level driver uses this function to fetch next buffered
5500 * frame. In most cases, this is used when generating beacon frame.
5501 *
5502 * Return: A pointer to the next buffered skb or NULL if no more buffered
5503 * frames are available.
5504 *
5505 * Note: buffered frames are returned only after DTIM beacon frame was
5506 * generated with ieee80211_beacon_get() and the low-level driver must thus
5507 * call ieee80211_beacon_get() first. ieee80211_get_buffered_bc() returns
5508 * NULL if the previous generated beacon was not DTIM, so the low-level driver
5509 * does not need to check for DTIM beacons separately and should be able to
5510 * use common code for all beacons.
5511 */
5512 struct sk_buff *
5513 ieee80211_get_buffered_bc(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
5514
5515 /**
5516 * ieee80211_get_tkip_p1k_iv - get a TKIP phase 1 key for IV32
5517 *
5518 * This function returns the TKIP phase 1 key for the given IV32.
5519 *
5520 * @keyconf: the parameter passed with the set key
5521 * @iv32: IV32 to get the P1K for
5522 * @p1k: a buffer to which the key will be written, as 5 u16 values
5523 */
5524 void ieee80211_get_tkip_p1k_iv(struct ieee80211_key_conf *keyconf,
5525 u32 iv32, u16 *p1k);
5526
5527 /**
5528 * ieee80211_get_tkip_p1k - get a TKIP phase 1 key
5529 *
5530 * This function returns the TKIP phase 1 key for the IV32 taken
5531 * from the given packet.
5532 *
5533 * @keyconf: the parameter passed with the set key
5534 * @skb: the packet to take the IV32 value from that will be encrypted
5535 * with this P1K
5536 * @p1k: a buffer to which the key will be written, as 5 u16 values
5537 */
ieee80211_get_tkip_p1k(struct ieee80211_key_conf * keyconf,struct sk_buff * skb,u16 * p1k)5538 static inline void ieee80211_get_tkip_p1k(struct ieee80211_key_conf *keyconf,
5539 struct sk_buff *skb, u16 *p1k)
5540 {
5541 struct ieee80211_hdr *hdr = (struct ieee80211_hdr *)skb->data;
5542 const u8 *data = (u8 *)hdr + ieee80211_hdrlen(hdr->frame_control);
5543 u32 iv32 = get_unaligned_le32(&data[4]);
5544
5545 ieee80211_get_tkip_p1k_iv(keyconf, iv32, p1k);
5546 }
5547
5548 /**
5549 * ieee80211_get_tkip_rx_p1k - get a TKIP phase 1 key for RX
5550 *
5551 * This function returns the TKIP phase 1 key for the given IV32
5552 * and transmitter address.
5553 *
5554 * @keyconf: the parameter passed with the set key
5555 * @ta: TA that will be used with the key
5556 * @iv32: IV32 to get the P1K for
5557 * @p1k: a buffer to which the key will be written, as 5 u16 values
5558 */
5559 void ieee80211_get_tkip_rx_p1k(struct ieee80211_key_conf *keyconf,
5560 const u8 *ta, u32 iv32, u16 *p1k);
5561
5562 /**
5563 * ieee80211_get_tkip_p2k - get a TKIP phase 2 key
5564 *
5565 * This function computes the TKIP RC4 key for the IV values
5566 * in the packet.
5567 *
5568 * @keyconf: the parameter passed with the set key
5569 * @skb: the packet to take the IV32/IV16 values from that will be
5570 * encrypted with this key
5571 * @p2k: a buffer to which the key will be written, 16 bytes
5572 */
5573 void ieee80211_get_tkip_p2k(struct ieee80211_key_conf *keyconf,
5574 struct sk_buff *skb, u8 *p2k);
5575
5576 /**
5577 * ieee80211_tkip_add_iv - write TKIP IV and Ext. IV to pos
5578 *
5579 * @pos: start of crypto header
5580 * @keyconf: the parameter passed with the set key
5581 * @pn: PN to add
5582 *
5583 * Returns: pointer to the octet following IVs (i.e. beginning of
5584 * the packet payload)
5585 *
5586 * This function writes the tkip IV value to pos (which should
5587 * point to the crypto header)
5588 */
5589 u8 *ieee80211_tkip_add_iv(u8 *pos, struct ieee80211_key_conf *keyconf, u64 pn);
5590
5591 /**
5592 * ieee80211_get_key_rx_seq - get key RX sequence counter
5593 *
5594 * @keyconf: the parameter passed with the set key
5595 * @tid: The TID, or -1 for the management frame value (CCMP/GCMP only);
5596 * the value on TID 0 is also used for non-QoS frames. For
5597 * CMAC, only TID 0 is valid.
5598 * @seq: buffer to receive the sequence data
5599 *
5600 * This function allows a driver to retrieve the current RX IV/PNs
5601 * for the given key. It must not be called if IV checking is done
5602 * by the device and not by mac80211.
5603 *
5604 * Note that this function may only be called when no RX processing
5605 * can be done concurrently.
5606 */
5607 void ieee80211_get_key_rx_seq(struct ieee80211_key_conf *keyconf,
5608 int tid, struct ieee80211_key_seq *seq);
5609
5610 /**
5611 * ieee80211_set_key_rx_seq - set key RX sequence counter
5612 *
5613 * @keyconf: the parameter passed with the set key
5614 * @tid: The TID, or -1 for the management frame value (CCMP/GCMP only);
5615 * the value on TID 0 is also used for non-QoS frames. For
5616 * CMAC, only TID 0 is valid.
5617 * @seq: new sequence data
5618 *
5619 * This function allows a driver to set the current RX IV/PNs for the
5620 * given key. This is useful when resuming from WoWLAN sleep and GTK
5621 * rekey may have been done while suspended. It should not be called
5622 * if IV checking is done by the device and not by mac80211.
5623 *
5624 * Note that this function may only be called when no RX processing
5625 * can be done concurrently.
5626 */
5627 void ieee80211_set_key_rx_seq(struct ieee80211_key_conf *keyconf,
5628 int tid, struct ieee80211_key_seq *seq);
5629
5630 /**
5631 * ieee80211_remove_key - remove the given key
5632 * @keyconf: the parameter passed with the set key
5633 *
5634 * Remove the given key. If the key was uploaded to the hardware at the
5635 * time this function is called, it is not deleted in the hardware but
5636 * instead assumed to have been removed already.
5637 *
5638 * Note that due to locking considerations this function can (currently)
5639 * only be called during key iteration (ieee80211_iter_keys().)
5640 */
5641 void ieee80211_remove_key(struct ieee80211_key_conf *keyconf);
5642
5643 /**
5644 * ieee80211_gtk_rekey_add - add a GTK key from rekeying during WoWLAN
5645 * @vif: the virtual interface to add the key on
5646 * @keyconf: new key data
5647 *
5648 * When GTK rekeying was done while the system was suspended, (a) new
5649 * key(s) will be available. These will be needed by mac80211 for proper
5650 * RX processing, so this function allows setting them.
5651 *
5652 * The function returns the newly allocated key structure, which will
5653 * have similar contents to the passed key configuration but point to
5654 * mac80211-owned memory. In case of errors, the function returns an
5655 * ERR_PTR(), use IS_ERR() etc.
5656 *
5657 * Note that this function assumes the key isn't added to hardware
5658 * acceleration, so no TX will be done with the key. Since it's a GTK
5659 * on managed (station) networks, this is true anyway. If the driver
5660 * calls this function from the resume callback and subsequently uses
5661 * the return code 1 to reconfigure the device, this key will be part
5662 * of the reconfiguration.
5663 *
5664 * Note that the driver should also call ieee80211_set_key_rx_seq()
5665 * for the new key for each TID to set up sequence counters properly.
5666 *
5667 * IMPORTANT: If this replaces a key that is present in the hardware,
5668 * then it will attempt to remove it during this call. In many cases
5669 * this isn't what you want, so call ieee80211_remove_key() first for
5670 * the key that's being replaced.
5671 */
5672 struct ieee80211_key_conf *
5673 ieee80211_gtk_rekey_add(struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
5674 struct ieee80211_key_conf *keyconf);
5675
5676 /**
5677 * ieee80211_gtk_rekey_notify - notify userspace supplicant of rekeying
5678 * @vif: virtual interface the rekeying was done on
5679 * @bssid: The BSSID of the AP, for checking association
5680 * @replay_ctr: the new replay counter after GTK rekeying
5681 * @gfp: allocation flags
5682 */
5683 void ieee80211_gtk_rekey_notify(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, const u8 *bssid,
5684 const u8 *replay_ctr, gfp_t gfp);
5685
5686 /**
5687 * ieee80211_key_mic_failure - increment MIC failure counter for the key
5688 *
5689 * Note: this is really only safe if no other RX function is called
5690 * at the same time.
5691 *
5692 * @keyconf: the key in question
5693 */
5694 void ieee80211_key_mic_failure(struct ieee80211_key_conf *keyconf);
5695
5696 /**
5697 * ieee80211_key_replay - increment replay counter for the key
5698 *
5699 * Note: this is really only safe if no other RX function is called
5700 * at the same time.
5701 *
5702 * @keyconf: the key in question
5703 */
5704 void ieee80211_key_replay(struct ieee80211_key_conf *keyconf);
5705
5706 /**
5707 * ieee80211_wake_queue - wake specific queue
5708 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
5709 * @queue: queue number (counted from zero).
5710 *
5711 * Drivers should use this function instead of netif_wake_queue.
5712 */
5713 void ieee80211_wake_queue(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, int queue);
5714
5715 /**
5716 * ieee80211_stop_queue - stop specific queue
5717 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
5718 * @queue: queue number (counted from zero).
5719 *
5720 * Drivers should use this function instead of netif_stop_queue.
5721 */
5722 void ieee80211_stop_queue(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, int queue);
5723
5724 /**
5725 * ieee80211_queue_stopped - test status of the queue
5726 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
5727 * @queue: queue number (counted from zero).
5728 *
5729 * Drivers should use this function instead of netif_stop_queue.
5730 *
5731 * Return: %true if the queue is stopped. %false otherwise.
5732 */
5733
5734 int ieee80211_queue_stopped(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, int queue);
5735
5736 /**
5737 * ieee80211_stop_queues - stop all queues
5738 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
5739 *
5740 * Drivers should use this function instead of netif_stop_queue.
5741 */
5742 void ieee80211_stop_queues(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
5743
5744 /**
5745 * ieee80211_wake_queues - wake all queues
5746 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
5747 *
5748 * Drivers should use this function instead of netif_wake_queue.
5749 */
5750 void ieee80211_wake_queues(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
5751
5752 /**
5753 * ieee80211_scan_completed - completed hardware scan
5754 *
5755 * When hardware scan offload is used (i.e. the hw_scan() callback is
5756 * assigned) this function needs to be called by the driver to notify
5757 * mac80211 that the scan finished. This function can be called from
5758 * any context, including hardirq context.
5759 *
5760 * @hw: the hardware that finished the scan
5761 * @info: information about the completed scan
5762 */
5763 void ieee80211_scan_completed(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
5764 struct cfg80211_scan_info *info);
5765
5766 /**
5767 * ieee80211_sched_scan_results - got results from scheduled scan
5768 *
5769 * When a scheduled scan is running, this function needs to be called by the
5770 * driver whenever there are new scan results available.
5771 *
5772 * @hw: the hardware that is performing scheduled scans
5773 */
5774 void ieee80211_sched_scan_results(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
5775
5776 /**
5777 * ieee80211_sched_scan_stopped - inform that the scheduled scan has stopped
5778 *
5779 * When a scheduled scan is running, this function can be called by
5780 * the driver if it needs to stop the scan to perform another task.
5781 * Usual scenarios are drivers that cannot continue the scheduled scan
5782 * while associating, for instance.
5783 *
5784 * @hw: the hardware that is performing scheduled scans
5785 */
5786 void ieee80211_sched_scan_stopped(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
5787
5788 /**
5789 * enum ieee80211_interface_iteration_flags - interface iteration flags
5790 * @IEEE80211_IFACE_ITER_NORMAL: Iterate over all interfaces that have
5791 * been added to the driver; However, note that during hardware
5792 * reconfiguration (after restart_hw) it will iterate over a new
5793 * interface and over all the existing interfaces even if they
5794 * haven't been re-added to the driver yet.
5795 * @IEEE80211_IFACE_ITER_RESUME_ALL: During resume, iterate over all
5796 * interfaces, even if they haven't been re-added to the driver yet.
5797 * @IEEE80211_IFACE_ITER_ACTIVE: Iterate only active interfaces (netdev is up).
5798 * @IEEE80211_IFACE_SKIP_SDATA_NOT_IN_DRIVER: Skip any interfaces where SDATA
5799 * is not in the driver. This may fix crashes during firmware recovery
5800 * for instance.
5801 */
5802 enum ieee80211_interface_iteration_flags {
5803 IEEE80211_IFACE_ITER_NORMAL = 0,
5804 IEEE80211_IFACE_ITER_RESUME_ALL = BIT(0),
5805 IEEE80211_IFACE_ITER_ACTIVE = BIT(1),
5806 IEEE80211_IFACE_SKIP_SDATA_NOT_IN_DRIVER = BIT(2),
5807 };
5808
5809 /**
5810 * ieee80211_iterate_interfaces - iterate interfaces
5811 *
5812 * This function iterates over the interfaces associated with a given
5813 * hardware and calls the callback for them. This includes active as well as
5814 * inactive interfaces. This function allows the iterator function to sleep.
5815 * Will iterate over a new interface during add_interface().
5816 *
5817 * @hw: the hardware struct of which the interfaces should be iterated over
5818 * @iter_flags: iteration flags, see &enum ieee80211_interface_iteration_flags
5819 * @iterator: the iterator function to call
5820 * @data: first argument of the iterator function
5821 */
5822 void ieee80211_iterate_interfaces(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, u32 iter_flags,
5823 void (*iterator)(void *data, u8 *mac,
5824 struct ieee80211_vif *vif),
5825 void *data);
5826
5827 /**
5828 * ieee80211_iterate_active_interfaces - iterate active interfaces
5829 *
5830 * This function iterates over the interfaces associated with a given
5831 * hardware that are currently active and calls the callback for them.
5832 * This function allows the iterator function to sleep, when the iterator
5833 * function is atomic @ieee80211_iterate_active_interfaces_atomic can
5834 * be used.
5835 * Does not iterate over a new interface during add_interface().
5836 *
5837 * @hw: the hardware struct of which the interfaces should be iterated over
5838 * @iter_flags: iteration flags, see &enum ieee80211_interface_iteration_flags
5839 * @iterator: the iterator function to call
5840 * @data: first argument of the iterator function
5841 */
5842 static inline void
ieee80211_iterate_active_interfaces(struct ieee80211_hw * hw,u32 iter_flags,void (* iterator)(void * data,u8 * mac,struct ieee80211_vif * vif),void * data)5843 ieee80211_iterate_active_interfaces(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, u32 iter_flags,
5844 void (*iterator)(void *data, u8 *mac,
5845 struct ieee80211_vif *vif),
5846 void *data)
5847 {
5848 ieee80211_iterate_interfaces(hw,
5849 iter_flags | IEEE80211_IFACE_ITER_ACTIVE,
5850 iterator, data);
5851 }
5852
5853 /**
5854 * ieee80211_iterate_active_interfaces_atomic - iterate active interfaces
5855 *
5856 * This function iterates over the interfaces associated with a given
5857 * hardware that are currently active and calls the callback for them.
5858 * This function requires the iterator callback function to be atomic,
5859 * if that is not desired, use @ieee80211_iterate_active_interfaces instead.
5860 * Does not iterate over a new interface during add_interface().
5861 *
5862 * @hw: the hardware struct of which the interfaces should be iterated over
5863 * @iter_flags: iteration flags, see &enum ieee80211_interface_iteration_flags
5864 * @iterator: the iterator function to call, cannot sleep
5865 * @data: first argument of the iterator function
5866 */
5867 void ieee80211_iterate_active_interfaces_atomic(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
5868 u32 iter_flags,
5869 void (*iterator)(void *data,
5870 u8 *mac,
5871 struct ieee80211_vif *vif),
5872 void *data);
5873
5874 /**
5875 * ieee80211_iterate_active_interfaces_mtx - iterate active interfaces
5876 *
5877 * This function iterates over the interfaces associated with a given
5878 * hardware that are currently active and calls the callback for them.
5879 * This version can only be used while holding the wiphy mutex.
5880 * The driver must not call this with a lock held that it can also take in
5881 * response to callbacks from mac80211, and it must not call this within
5882 * callbacks made by mac80211 - both would result in deadlocks.
5883 *
5884 * @hw: the hardware struct of which the interfaces should be iterated over
5885 * @iter_flags: iteration flags, see &enum ieee80211_interface_iteration_flags
5886 * @iterator: the iterator function to call, cannot sleep
5887 * @data: first argument of the iterator function
5888 */
5889 void ieee80211_iterate_active_interfaces_mtx(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
5890 u32 iter_flags,
5891 void (*iterator)(void *data,
5892 u8 *mac,
5893 struct ieee80211_vif *vif),
5894 void *data);
5895
5896 /**
5897 * ieee80211_iterate_stations - iterate stations
5898 *
5899 * This function iterates over all stations associated with a given
5900 * hardware that are currently uploaded to the driver and calls the callback
5901 * function for them.
5902 * This function allows the iterator function to sleep, when the iterator
5903 * function is atomic @ieee80211_iterate_stations_atomic can be used.
5904 *
5905 * @hw: the hardware struct of which the interfaces should be iterated over
5906 * @iterator: the iterator function to call, cannot sleep
5907 * @data: first argument of the iterator function
5908 */
5909 void ieee80211_iterate_stations(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
5910 void (*iterator)(void *data,
5911 struct ieee80211_sta *sta),
5912 void *data);
5913
5914 /**
5915 * ieee80211_iterate_stations_atomic - iterate stations
5916 *
5917 * This function iterates over all stations associated with a given
5918 * hardware that are currently uploaded to the driver and calls the callback
5919 * function for them.
5920 * This function requires the iterator callback function to be atomic,
5921 *
5922 * @hw: the hardware struct of which the interfaces should be iterated over
5923 * @iterator: the iterator function to call, cannot sleep
5924 * @data: first argument of the iterator function
5925 */
5926 void ieee80211_iterate_stations_atomic(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
5927 void (*iterator)(void *data,
5928 struct ieee80211_sta *sta),
5929 void *data);
5930 /**
5931 * ieee80211_queue_work - add work onto the mac80211 workqueue
5932 *
5933 * Drivers and mac80211 use this to add work onto the mac80211 workqueue.
5934 * This helper ensures drivers are not queueing work when they should not be.
5935 *
5936 * @hw: the hardware struct for the interface we are adding work for
5937 * @work: the work we want to add onto the mac80211 workqueue
5938 */
5939 void ieee80211_queue_work(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct work_struct *work);
5940
5941 /**
5942 * ieee80211_queue_delayed_work - add work onto the mac80211 workqueue
5943 *
5944 * Drivers and mac80211 use this to queue delayed work onto the mac80211
5945 * workqueue.
5946 *
5947 * @hw: the hardware struct for the interface we are adding work for
5948 * @dwork: delayable work to queue onto the mac80211 workqueue
5949 * @delay: number of jiffies to wait before queueing
5950 */
5951 void ieee80211_queue_delayed_work(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
5952 struct delayed_work *dwork,
5953 unsigned long delay);
5954
5955 /**
5956 * ieee80211_start_tx_ba_session - Start a tx Block Ack session.
5957 * @sta: the station for which to start a BA session
5958 * @tid: the TID to BA on.
5959 * @timeout: session timeout value (in TUs)
5960 *
5961 * Return: success if addBA request was sent, failure otherwise
5962 *
5963 * Although mac80211/low level driver/user space application can estimate
5964 * the need to start aggregation on a certain RA/TID, the session level
5965 * will be managed by the mac80211.
5966 */
5967 int ieee80211_start_tx_ba_session(struct ieee80211_sta *sta, u16 tid,
5968 u16 timeout);
5969
5970 /**
5971 * ieee80211_start_tx_ba_cb_irqsafe - low level driver ready to aggregate.
5972 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback
5973 * @ra: receiver address of the BA session recipient.
5974 * @tid: the TID to BA on.
5975 *
5976 * This function must be called by low level driver once it has
5977 * finished with preparations for the BA session. It can be called
5978 * from any context.
5979 */
5980 void ieee80211_start_tx_ba_cb_irqsafe(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, const u8 *ra,
5981 u16 tid);
5982
5983 /**
5984 * ieee80211_stop_tx_ba_session - Stop a Block Ack session.
5985 * @sta: the station whose BA session to stop
5986 * @tid: the TID to stop BA.
5987 *
5988 * Return: negative error if the TID is invalid, or no aggregation active
5989 *
5990 * Although mac80211/low level driver/user space application can estimate
5991 * the need to stop aggregation on a certain RA/TID, the session level
5992 * will be managed by the mac80211.
5993 */
5994 int ieee80211_stop_tx_ba_session(struct ieee80211_sta *sta, u16 tid);
5995
5996 /**
5997 * ieee80211_stop_tx_ba_cb_irqsafe - low level driver ready to stop aggregate.
5998 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback
5999 * @ra: receiver address of the BA session recipient.
6000 * @tid: the desired TID to BA on.
6001 *
6002 * This function must be called by low level driver once it has
6003 * finished with preparations for the BA session tear down. It
6004 * can be called from any context.
6005 */
6006 void ieee80211_stop_tx_ba_cb_irqsafe(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, const u8 *ra,
6007 u16 tid);
6008
6009 /**
6010 * ieee80211_find_sta - find a station
6011 *
6012 * @vif: virtual interface to look for station on
6013 * @addr: station's address
6014 *
6015 * Return: The station, if found. %NULL otherwise.
6016 *
6017 * Note: This function must be called under RCU lock and the
6018 * resulting pointer is only valid under RCU lock as well.
6019 */
6020 struct ieee80211_sta *ieee80211_find_sta(struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
6021 const u8 *addr);
6022
6023 /**
6024 * ieee80211_find_sta_by_ifaddr - find a station on hardware
6025 *
6026 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw()
6027 * @addr: remote station's address
6028 * @localaddr: local address (vif->sdata->vif.addr). Use NULL for 'any'.
6029 *
6030 * Return: The station, if found. %NULL otherwise.
6031 *
6032 * Note: This function must be called under RCU lock and the
6033 * resulting pointer is only valid under RCU lock as well.
6034 *
6035 * NOTE: You may pass NULL for localaddr, but then you will just get
6036 * the first STA that matches the remote address 'addr'.
6037 * We can have multiple STA associated with multiple
6038 * logical stations (e.g. consider a station connecting to another
6039 * BSSID on the same AP hardware without disconnecting first).
6040 * In this case, the result of this method with localaddr NULL
6041 * is not reliable.
6042 *
6043 * DO NOT USE THIS FUNCTION with localaddr NULL if at all possible.
6044 */
6045 struct ieee80211_sta *ieee80211_find_sta_by_ifaddr(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
6046 const u8 *addr,
6047 const u8 *localaddr);
6048
6049 /**
6050 * ieee80211_find_sta_by_link_addrs - find STA by link addresses
6051 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw()
6052 * @addr: remote station's link address
6053 * @localaddr: local link address, use %NULL for any (but avoid that)
6054 * @link_id: pointer to obtain the link ID if the STA is found,
6055 * may be %NULL if the link ID is not needed
6056 *
6057 * Obtain the STA by link address, must use RCU protection.
6058 */
6059 struct ieee80211_sta *
6060 ieee80211_find_sta_by_link_addrs(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
6061 const u8 *addr,
6062 const u8 *localaddr,
6063 unsigned int *link_id);
6064
6065 /**
6066 * ieee80211_sta_block_awake - block station from waking up
6067 * @hw: the hardware
6068 * @pubsta: the station
6069 * @block: whether to block or unblock
6070 *
6071 * Some devices require that all frames that are on the queues
6072 * for a specific station that went to sleep are flushed before
6073 * a poll response or frames after the station woke up can be
6074 * delivered to that it. Note that such frames must be rejected
6075 * by the driver as filtered, with the appropriate status flag.
6076 *
6077 * This function allows implementing this mode in a race-free
6078 * manner.
6079 *
6080 * To do this, a driver must keep track of the number of frames
6081 * still enqueued for a specific station. If this number is not
6082 * zero when the station goes to sleep, the driver must call
6083 * this function to force mac80211 to consider the station to
6084 * be asleep regardless of the station's actual state. Once the
6085 * number of outstanding frames reaches zero, the driver must
6086 * call this function again to unblock the station. That will
6087 * cause mac80211 to be able to send ps-poll responses, and if
6088 * the station queried in the meantime then frames will also
6089 * be sent out as a result of this. Additionally, the driver
6090 * will be notified that the station woke up some time after
6091 * it is unblocked, regardless of whether the station actually
6092 * woke up while blocked or not.
6093 */
6094 void ieee80211_sta_block_awake(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
6095 struct ieee80211_sta *pubsta, bool block);
6096
6097 /**
6098 * ieee80211_sta_eosp - notify mac80211 about end of SP
6099 * @pubsta: the station
6100 *
6101 * When a device transmits frames in a way that it can't tell
6102 * mac80211 in the TX status about the EOSP, it must clear the
6103 * %IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_EOSP bit and call this function instead.
6104 * This applies for PS-Poll as well as uAPSD.
6105 *
6106 * Note that just like with _tx_status() and _rx() drivers must
6107 * not mix calls to irqsafe/non-irqsafe versions, this function
6108 * must not be mixed with those either. Use the all irqsafe, or
6109 * all non-irqsafe, don't mix!
6110 *
6111 * NB: the _irqsafe version of this function doesn't exist, no
6112 * driver needs it right now. Don't call this function if
6113 * you'd need the _irqsafe version, look at the git history
6114 * and restore the _irqsafe version!
6115 */
6116 void ieee80211_sta_eosp(struct ieee80211_sta *pubsta);
6117
6118 /**
6119 * ieee80211_send_eosp_nullfunc - ask mac80211 to send NDP with EOSP
6120 * @pubsta: the station
6121 * @tid: the tid of the NDP
6122 *
6123 * Sometimes the device understands that it needs to close
6124 * the Service Period unexpectedly. This can happen when
6125 * sending frames that are filling holes in the BA window.
6126 * In this case, the device can ask mac80211 to send a
6127 * Nullfunc frame with EOSP set. When that happens, the
6128 * driver must have called ieee80211_sta_set_buffered() to
6129 * let mac80211 know that there are no buffered frames any
6130 * more, otherwise mac80211 will get the more_data bit wrong.
6131 * The low level driver must have made sure that the frame
6132 * will be sent despite the station being in power-save.
6133 * Mac80211 won't call allow_buffered_frames().
6134 * Note that calling this function, doesn't exempt the driver
6135 * from closing the EOSP properly, it will still have to call
6136 * ieee80211_sta_eosp when the NDP is sent.
6137 */
6138 void ieee80211_send_eosp_nullfunc(struct ieee80211_sta *pubsta, int tid);
6139
6140 /**
6141 * ieee80211_sta_recalc_aggregates - recalculate aggregate data after a change
6142 * @pubsta: the station
6143 *
6144 * Call this function after changing a per-link aggregate data as referenced in
6145 * &struct ieee80211_sta_aggregates by accessing the agg field of
6146 * &struct ieee80211_link_sta.
6147 *
6148 * With non MLO the data in deflink will be referenced directly. In that case
6149 * there is no need to call this function.
6150 */
6151 void ieee80211_sta_recalc_aggregates(struct ieee80211_sta *pubsta);
6152
6153 /**
6154 * ieee80211_sta_register_airtime - register airtime usage for a sta/tid
6155 *
6156 * Register airtime usage for a given sta on a given tid. The driver must call
6157 * this function to notify mac80211 that a station used a certain amount of
6158 * airtime. This information will be used by the TXQ scheduler to schedule
6159 * stations in a way that ensures airtime fairness.
6160 *
6161 * The reported airtime should as a minimum include all time that is spent
6162 * transmitting to the remote station, including overhead and padding, but not
6163 * including time spent waiting for a TXOP. If the time is not reported by the
6164 * hardware it can in some cases be calculated from the rate and known frame
6165 * composition. When possible, the time should include any failed transmission
6166 * attempts.
6167 *
6168 * The driver can either call this function synchronously for every packet or
6169 * aggregate, or asynchronously as airtime usage information becomes available.
6170 * TX and RX airtime can be reported together, or separately by setting one of
6171 * them to 0.
6172 *
6173 * @pubsta: the station
6174 * @tid: the TID to register airtime for
6175 * @tx_airtime: airtime used during TX (in usec)
6176 * @rx_airtime: airtime used during RX (in usec)
6177 */
6178 void ieee80211_sta_register_airtime(struct ieee80211_sta *pubsta, u8 tid,
6179 u32 tx_airtime, u32 rx_airtime);
6180
6181 /**
6182 * ieee80211_txq_airtime_check - check if a txq can send frame to device
6183 *
6184 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw()
6185 * @txq: pointer obtained from station or virtual interface
6186 *
6187 * Return true if the AQL's airtime limit has not been reached and the txq can
6188 * continue to send more packets to the device. Otherwise return false.
6189 */
6190 bool
6191 ieee80211_txq_airtime_check(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_txq *txq);
6192
6193 /**
6194 * ieee80211_iter_keys - iterate keys programmed into the device
6195 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw()
6196 * @vif: virtual interface to iterate, may be %NULL for all
6197 * @iter: iterator function that will be called for each key
6198 * @iter_data: custom data to pass to the iterator function
6199 *
6200 * This function can be used to iterate all the keys known to
6201 * mac80211, even those that weren't previously programmed into
6202 * the device. This is intended for use in WoWLAN if the device
6203 * needs reprogramming of the keys during suspend. Note that due
6204 * to locking reasons, it is also only safe to call this at few
6205 * spots since it must hold the RTNL and be able to sleep.
6206 *
6207 * The order in which the keys are iterated matches the order
6208 * in which they were originally installed and handed to the
6209 * set_key callback.
6210 */
6211 void ieee80211_iter_keys(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
6212 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
6213 void (*iter)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
6214 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
6215 struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
6216 struct ieee80211_key_conf *key,
6217 void *data),
6218 void *iter_data);
6219
6220 /**
6221 * ieee80211_iter_keys_rcu - iterate keys programmed into the device
6222 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw()
6223 * @vif: virtual interface to iterate, may be %NULL for all
6224 * @iter: iterator function that will be called for each key
6225 * @iter_data: custom data to pass to the iterator function
6226 *
6227 * This function can be used to iterate all the keys known to
6228 * mac80211, even those that weren't previously programmed into
6229 * the device. Note that due to locking reasons, keys of station
6230 * in removal process will be skipped.
6231 *
6232 * This function requires being called in an RCU critical section,
6233 * and thus iter must be atomic.
6234 */
6235 void ieee80211_iter_keys_rcu(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
6236 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
6237 void (*iter)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
6238 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
6239 struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
6240 struct ieee80211_key_conf *key,
6241 void *data),
6242 void *iter_data);
6243
6244 /**
6245 * ieee80211_iter_chan_contexts_atomic - iterate channel contexts
6246 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
6247 * @iter: iterator function
6248 * @iter_data: data passed to iterator function
6249 *
6250 * Iterate all active channel contexts. This function is atomic and
6251 * doesn't acquire any locks internally that might be held in other
6252 * places while calling into the driver.
6253 *
6254 * The iterator will not find a context that's being added (during
6255 * the driver callback to add it) but will find it while it's being
6256 * removed.
6257 *
6258 * Note that during hardware restart, all contexts that existed
6259 * before the restart are considered already present so will be
6260 * found while iterating, whether they've been re-added already
6261 * or not.
6262 */
6263 void ieee80211_iter_chan_contexts_atomic(
6264 struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
6265 void (*iter)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
6266 struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf *chanctx_conf,
6267 void *data),
6268 void *iter_data);
6269
6270 /**
6271 * ieee80211_ap_probereq_get - retrieve a Probe Request template
6272 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
6273 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
6274 *
6275 * Creates a Probe Request template which can, for example, be uploaded to
6276 * hardware. The template is filled with bssid, ssid and supported rate
6277 * information. This function must only be called from within the
6278 * .bss_info_changed callback function and only in managed mode. The function
6279 * is only useful when the interface is associated, otherwise it will return
6280 * %NULL.
6281 *
6282 * Return: The Probe Request template. %NULL on error.
6283 */
6284 struct sk_buff *ieee80211_ap_probereq_get(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
6285 struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
6286
6287 /**
6288 * ieee80211_beacon_loss - inform hardware does not receive beacons
6289 *
6290 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
6291 *
6292 * When beacon filtering is enabled with %IEEE80211_VIF_BEACON_FILTER and
6293 * %IEEE80211_CONF_PS is set, the driver needs to inform whenever the
6294 * hardware is not receiving beacons with this function.
6295 */
6296 void ieee80211_beacon_loss(struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
6297
6298 /**
6299 * ieee80211_connection_loss - inform hardware has lost connection to the AP
6300 *
6301 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
6302 *
6303 * When beacon filtering is enabled with %IEEE80211_VIF_BEACON_FILTER, and
6304 * %IEEE80211_CONF_PS and %IEEE80211_HW_CONNECTION_MONITOR are set, the driver
6305 * needs to inform if the connection to the AP has been lost.
6306 * The function may also be called if the connection needs to be terminated
6307 * for some other reason, even if %IEEE80211_HW_CONNECTION_MONITOR isn't set.
6308 *
6309 * This function will cause immediate change to disassociated state,
6310 * without connection recovery attempts.
6311 */
6312 void ieee80211_connection_loss(struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
6313
6314 /**
6315 * ieee80211_disconnect - request disconnection
6316 *
6317 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
6318 * @reconnect: immediate reconnect is desired
6319 *
6320 * Request disconnection from the current network and, if enabled, send a
6321 * hint to the higher layers that immediate reconnect is desired.
6322 */
6323 void ieee80211_disconnect(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, bool reconnect);
6324
6325 /**
6326 * ieee80211_resume_disconnect - disconnect from AP after resume
6327 *
6328 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
6329 *
6330 * Instructs mac80211 to disconnect from the AP after resume.
6331 * Drivers can use this after WoWLAN if they know that the
6332 * connection cannot be kept up, for example because keys were
6333 * used while the device was asleep but the replay counters or
6334 * similar cannot be retrieved from the device during resume.
6335 *
6336 * Note that due to implementation issues, if the driver uses
6337 * the reconfiguration functionality during resume the interface
6338 * will still be added as associated first during resume and then
6339 * disconnect normally later.
6340 *
6341 * This function can only be called from the resume callback and
6342 * the driver must not be holding any of its own locks while it
6343 * calls this function, or at least not any locks it needs in the
6344 * key configuration paths (if it supports HW crypto).
6345 */
6346 void ieee80211_resume_disconnect(struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
6347
6348 /**
6349 * ieee80211_hw_restart_disconnect - disconnect from AP after
6350 * hardware restart
6351 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
6352 *
6353 * Instructs mac80211 to disconnect from the AP after
6354 * hardware restart.
6355 */
6356 void ieee80211_hw_restart_disconnect(struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
6357
6358 /**
6359 * ieee80211_cqm_rssi_notify - inform a configured connection quality monitoring
6360 * rssi threshold triggered
6361 *
6362 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
6363 * @rssi_event: the RSSI trigger event type
6364 * @rssi_level: new RSSI level value or 0 if not available
6365 * @gfp: context flags
6366 *
6367 * When the %IEEE80211_VIF_SUPPORTS_CQM_RSSI is set, and a connection quality
6368 * monitoring is configured with an rssi threshold, the driver will inform
6369 * whenever the rssi level reaches the threshold.
6370 */
6371 void ieee80211_cqm_rssi_notify(struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
6372 enum nl80211_cqm_rssi_threshold_event rssi_event,
6373 s32 rssi_level,
6374 gfp_t gfp);
6375
6376 /**
6377 * ieee80211_cqm_beacon_loss_notify - inform CQM of beacon loss
6378 *
6379 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
6380 * @gfp: context flags
6381 */
6382 void ieee80211_cqm_beacon_loss_notify(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, gfp_t gfp);
6383
6384 /**
6385 * ieee80211_radar_detected - inform that a radar was detected
6386 *
6387 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw()
6388 */
6389 void ieee80211_radar_detected(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
6390
6391 /**
6392 * ieee80211_chswitch_done - Complete channel switch process
6393 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
6394 * @success: make the channel switch successful or not
6395 *
6396 * Complete the channel switch post-process: set the new operational channel
6397 * and wake up the suspended queues.
6398 */
6399 void ieee80211_chswitch_done(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, bool success);
6400
6401 /**
6402 * ieee80211_channel_switch_disconnect - disconnect due to channel switch error
6403 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
6404 * @block_tx: if %true, do not send deauth frame.
6405 *
6406 * Instruct mac80211 to disconnect due to a channel switch error. The channel
6407 * switch can request to block the tx and so, we need to make sure we do not send
6408 * a deauth frame in this case.
6409 */
6410 void ieee80211_channel_switch_disconnect(struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
6411 bool block_tx);
6412
6413 /**
6414 * ieee80211_request_smps - request SM PS transition
6415 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
6416 * @link_id: link ID for MLO, or 0
6417 * @smps_mode: new SM PS mode
6418 *
6419 * This allows the driver to request an SM PS transition in managed
6420 * mode. This is useful when the driver has more information than
6421 * the stack about possible interference, for example by bluetooth.
6422 */
6423 void ieee80211_request_smps(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, unsigned int link_id,
6424 enum ieee80211_smps_mode smps_mode);
6425
6426 /**
6427 * ieee80211_ready_on_channel - notification of remain-on-channel start
6428 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw()
6429 */
6430 void ieee80211_ready_on_channel(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
6431
6432 /**
6433 * ieee80211_remain_on_channel_expired - remain_on_channel duration expired
6434 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw()
6435 */
6436 void ieee80211_remain_on_channel_expired(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
6437
6438 /**
6439 * ieee80211_stop_rx_ba_session - callback to stop existing BA sessions
6440 *
6441 * in order not to harm the system performance and user experience, the device
6442 * may request not to allow any rx ba session and tear down existing rx ba
6443 * sessions based on system constraints such as periodic BT activity that needs
6444 * to limit wlan activity (eg.sco or a2dp)."
6445 * in such cases, the intention is to limit the duration of the rx ppdu and
6446 * therefore prevent the peer device to use a-mpdu aggregation.
6447 *
6448 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
6449 * @ba_rx_bitmap: Bit map of open rx ba per tid
6450 * @addr: & to bssid mac address
6451 */
6452 void ieee80211_stop_rx_ba_session(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, u16 ba_rx_bitmap,
6453 const u8 *addr);
6454
6455 /**
6456 * ieee80211_mark_rx_ba_filtered_frames - move RX BA window and mark filtered
6457 * @pubsta: station struct
6458 * @tid: the session's TID
6459 * @ssn: starting sequence number of the bitmap, all frames before this are
6460 * assumed to be out of the window after the call
6461 * @filtered: bitmap of filtered frames, BIT(0) is the @ssn entry etc.
6462 * @received_mpdus: number of received mpdus in firmware
6463 *
6464 * This function moves the BA window and releases all frames before @ssn, and
6465 * marks frames marked in the bitmap as having been filtered. Afterwards, it
6466 * checks if any frames in the window starting from @ssn can now be released
6467 * (in case they were only waiting for frames that were filtered.)
6468 * (Only work correctly if @max_rx_aggregation_subframes <= 64 frames)
6469 */
6470 void ieee80211_mark_rx_ba_filtered_frames(struct ieee80211_sta *pubsta, u8 tid,
6471 u16 ssn, u64 filtered,
6472 u16 received_mpdus);
6473
6474 /**
6475 * ieee80211_send_bar - send a BlockAckReq frame
6476 *
6477 * can be used to flush pending frames from the peer's aggregation reorder
6478 * buffer.
6479 *
6480 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
6481 * @ra: the peer's destination address
6482 * @tid: the TID of the aggregation session
6483 * @ssn: the new starting sequence number for the receiver
6484 */
6485 void ieee80211_send_bar(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, u8 *ra, u16 tid, u16 ssn);
6486
6487 /**
6488 * ieee80211_manage_rx_ba_offl - helper to queue an RX BA work
6489 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback
6490 * @addr: station mac address
6491 * @tid: the rx tid
6492 */
6493 void ieee80211_manage_rx_ba_offl(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, const u8 *addr,
6494 unsigned int tid);
6495
6496 /**
6497 * ieee80211_start_rx_ba_session_offl - start a Rx BA session
6498 *
6499 * Some device drivers may offload part of the Rx aggregation flow including
6500 * AddBa/DelBa negotiation but may otherwise be incapable of full Rx
6501 * reordering.
6502 *
6503 * Create structures responsible for reordering so device drivers may call here
6504 * when they complete AddBa negotiation.
6505 *
6506 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback
6507 * @addr: station mac address
6508 * @tid: the rx tid
6509 */
ieee80211_start_rx_ba_session_offl(struct ieee80211_vif * vif,const u8 * addr,u16 tid)6510 static inline void ieee80211_start_rx_ba_session_offl(struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
6511 const u8 *addr, u16 tid)
6512 {
6513 if (WARN_ON(tid >= IEEE80211_NUM_TIDS))
6514 return;
6515 ieee80211_manage_rx_ba_offl(vif, addr, tid);
6516 }
6517
6518 /**
6519 * ieee80211_stop_rx_ba_session_offl - stop a Rx BA session
6520 *
6521 * Some device drivers may offload part of the Rx aggregation flow including
6522 * AddBa/DelBa negotiation but may otherwise be incapable of full Rx
6523 * reordering.
6524 *
6525 * Destroy structures responsible for reordering so device drivers may call here
6526 * when they complete DelBa negotiation.
6527 *
6528 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback
6529 * @addr: station mac address
6530 * @tid: the rx tid
6531 */
ieee80211_stop_rx_ba_session_offl(struct ieee80211_vif * vif,const u8 * addr,u16 tid)6532 static inline void ieee80211_stop_rx_ba_session_offl(struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
6533 const u8 *addr, u16 tid)
6534 {
6535 if (WARN_ON(tid >= IEEE80211_NUM_TIDS))
6536 return;
6537 ieee80211_manage_rx_ba_offl(vif, addr, tid + IEEE80211_NUM_TIDS);
6538 }
6539
6540 /**
6541 * ieee80211_rx_ba_timer_expired - stop a Rx BA session due to timeout
6542 *
6543 * Some device drivers do not offload AddBa/DelBa negotiation, but handle rx
6544 * buffer reording internally, and therefore also handle the session timer.
6545 *
6546 * Trigger the timeout flow, which sends a DelBa.
6547 *
6548 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback
6549 * @addr: station mac address
6550 * @tid: the rx tid
6551 */
6552 void ieee80211_rx_ba_timer_expired(struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
6553 const u8 *addr, unsigned int tid);
6554
6555 /* Rate control API */
6556
6557 /**
6558 * struct ieee80211_tx_rate_control - rate control information for/from RC algo
6559 *
6560 * @hw: The hardware the algorithm is invoked for.
6561 * @sband: The band this frame is being transmitted on.
6562 * @bss_conf: the current BSS configuration
6563 * @skb: the skb that will be transmitted, the control information in it needs
6564 * to be filled in
6565 * @reported_rate: The rate control algorithm can fill this in to indicate
6566 * which rate should be reported to userspace as the current rate and
6567 * used for rate calculations in the mesh network.
6568 * @rts: whether RTS will be used for this frame because it is longer than the
6569 * RTS threshold
6570 * @short_preamble: whether mac80211 will request short-preamble transmission
6571 * if the selected rate supports it
6572 * @rate_idx_mask: user-requested (legacy) rate mask
6573 * @rate_idx_mcs_mask: user-requested MCS rate mask (NULL if not in use)
6574 * @bss: whether this frame is sent out in AP or IBSS mode
6575 */
6576 struct ieee80211_tx_rate_control {
6577 struct ieee80211_hw *hw;
6578 struct ieee80211_supported_band *sband;
6579 struct ieee80211_bss_conf *bss_conf;
6580 struct sk_buff *skb;
6581 struct ieee80211_tx_rate reported_rate;
6582 bool rts, short_preamble;
6583 u32 rate_idx_mask;
6584 u8 *rate_idx_mcs_mask;
6585 bool bss;
6586 };
6587
6588 /**
6589 * enum rate_control_capabilities - rate control capabilities
6590 */
6591 enum rate_control_capabilities {
6592 /**
6593 * @RATE_CTRL_CAPA_VHT_EXT_NSS_BW:
6594 * Support for extended NSS BW support (dot11VHTExtendedNSSCapable)
6595 * Note that this is only looked at if the minimum number of chains
6596 * that the AP uses is < the number of TX chains the hardware has,
6597 * otherwise the NSS difference doesn't bother us.
6598 */
6599 RATE_CTRL_CAPA_VHT_EXT_NSS_BW = BIT(0),
6600 /**
6601 * @RATE_CTRL_CAPA_AMPDU_TRIGGER:
6602 * mac80211 should start A-MPDU sessions on tx
6603 */
6604 RATE_CTRL_CAPA_AMPDU_TRIGGER = BIT(1),
6605 };
6606
6607 struct rate_control_ops {
6608 unsigned long capa;
6609 const char *name;
6610 void *(*alloc)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
6611 void (*add_debugfs)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, void *priv,
6612 struct dentry *debugfsdir);
6613 void (*free)(void *priv);
6614
6615 void *(*alloc_sta)(void *priv, struct ieee80211_sta *sta, gfp_t gfp);
6616 void (*rate_init)(void *priv, struct ieee80211_supported_band *sband,
6617 struct cfg80211_chan_def *chandef,
6618 struct ieee80211_sta *sta, void *priv_sta);
6619 void (*rate_update)(void *priv, struct ieee80211_supported_band *sband,
6620 struct cfg80211_chan_def *chandef,
6621 struct ieee80211_sta *sta, void *priv_sta,
6622 u32 changed);
6623 void (*free_sta)(void *priv, struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
6624 void *priv_sta);
6625
6626 void (*tx_status_ext)(void *priv,
6627 struct ieee80211_supported_band *sband,
6628 void *priv_sta, struct ieee80211_tx_status *st);
6629 void (*tx_status)(void *priv, struct ieee80211_supported_band *sband,
6630 struct ieee80211_sta *sta, void *priv_sta,
6631 struct sk_buff *skb);
6632 void (*get_rate)(void *priv, struct ieee80211_sta *sta, void *priv_sta,
6633 struct ieee80211_tx_rate_control *txrc);
6634
6635 void (*add_sta_debugfs)(void *priv, void *priv_sta,
6636 struct dentry *dir);
6637
6638 u32 (*get_expected_throughput)(void *priv_sta);
6639
6640 ANDROID_KABI_RESERVE(1);
6641 ANDROID_KABI_RESERVE(2);
6642 ANDROID_KABI_RESERVE(3);
6643 ANDROID_KABI_RESERVE(4);
6644 };
6645
rate_supported(struct ieee80211_sta * sta,enum nl80211_band band,int index)6646 static inline int rate_supported(struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
6647 enum nl80211_band band,
6648 int index)
6649 {
6650 return (sta == NULL || sta->deflink.supp_rates[band] & BIT(index));
6651 }
6652
6653 static inline s8
rate_lowest_index(struct ieee80211_supported_band * sband,struct ieee80211_sta * sta)6654 rate_lowest_index(struct ieee80211_supported_band *sband,
6655 struct ieee80211_sta *sta)
6656 {
6657 int i;
6658
6659 for (i = 0; i < sband->n_bitrates; i++)
6660 if (rate_supported(sta, sband->band, i))
6661 return i;
6662
6663 /* warn when we cannot find a rate. */
6664 WARN_ON_ONCE(1);
6665
6666 /* and return 0 (the lowest index) */
6667 return 0;
6668 }
6669
6670 static inline
rate_usable_index_exists(struct ieee80211_supported_band * sband,struct ieee80211_sta * sta)6671 bool rate_usable_index_exists(struct ieee80211_supported_band *sband,
6672 struct ieee80211_sta *sta)
6673 {
6674 unsigned int i;
6675
6676 for (i = 0; i < sband->n_bitrates; i++)
6677 if (rate_supported(sta, sband->band, i))
6678 return true;
6679 return false;
6680 }
6681
6682 /**
6683 * rate_control_set_rates - pass the sta rate selection to mac80211/driver
6684 *
6685 * When not doing a rate control probe to test rates, rate control should pass
6686 * its rate selection to mac80211. If the driver supports receiving a station
6687 * rate table, it will use it to ensure that frames are always sent based on
6688 * the most recent rate control module decision.
6689 *
6690 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw()
6691 * @pubsta: &struct ieee80211_sta pointer to the target destination.
6692 * @rates: new tx rate set to be used for this station.
6693 */
6694 int rate_control_set_rates(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
6695 struct ieee80211_sta *pubsta,
6696 struct ieee80211_sta_rates *rates);
6697
6698 int ieee80211_rate_control_register(const struct rate_control_ops *ops);
6699 void ieee80211_rate_control_unregister(const struct rate_control_ops *ops);
6700
6701 static inline bool
conf_is_ht20(struct ieee80211_conf * conf)6702 conf_is_ht20(struct ieee80211_conf *conf)
6703 {
6704 return conf->chandef.width == NL80211_CHAN_WIDTH_20;
6705 }
6706
6707 static inline bool
conf_is_ht40_minus(struct ieee80211_conf * conf)6708 conf_is_ht40_minus(struct ieee80211_conf *conf)
6709 {
6710 return conf->chandef.width == NL80211_CHAN_WIDTH_40 &&
6711 conf->chandef.center_freq1 < conf->chandef.chan->center_freq;
6712 }
6713
6714 static inline bool
conf_is_ht40_plus(struct ieee80211_conf * conf)6715 conf_is_ht40_plus(struct ieee80211_conf *conf)
6716 {
6717 return conf->chandef.width == NL80211_CHAN_WIDTH_40 &&
6718 conf->chandef.center_freq1 > conf->chandef.chan->center_freq;
6719 }
6720
6721 static inline bool
conf_is_ht40(struct ieee80211_conf * conf)6722 conf_is_ht40(struct ieee80211_conf *conf)
6723 {
6724 return conf->chandef.width == NL80211_CHAN_WIDTH_40;
6725 }
6726
6727 static inline bool
conf_is_ht(struct ieee80211_conf * conf)6728 conf_is_ht(struct ieee80211_conf *conf)
6729 {
6730 return (conf->chandef.width != NL80211_CHAN_WIDTH_5) &&
6731 (conf->chandef.width != NL80211_CHAN_WIDTH_10) &&
6732 (conf->chandef.width != NL80211_CHAN_WIDTH_20_NOHT);
6733 }
6734
6735 static inline enum nl80211_iftype
ieee80211_iftype_p2p(enum nl80211_iftype type,bool p2p)6736 ieee80211_iftype_p2p(enum nl80211_iftype type, bool p2p)
6737 {
6738 if (p2p) {
6739 switch (type) {
6740 case NL80211_IFTYPE_STATION:
6741 return NL80211_IFTYPE_P2P_CLIENT;
6742 case NL80211_IFTYPE_AP:
6743 return NL80211_IFTYPE_P2P_GO;
6744 default:
6745 break;
6746 }
6747 }
6748 return type;
6749 }
6750
6751 static inline enum nl80211_iftype
ieee80211_vif_type_p2p(struct ieee80211_vif * vif)6752 ieee80211_vif_type_p2p(struct ieee80211_vif *vif)
6753 {
6754 return ieee80211_iftype_p2p(vif->type, vif->p2p);
6755 }
6756
6757 /**
6758 * ieee80211_update_mu_groups - set the VHT MU-MIMO groud data
6759 *
6760 * @vif: the specified virtual interface
6761 * @link_id: the link ID for MLO, otherwise 0
6762 * @membership: 64 bits array - a bit is set if station is member of the group
6763 * @position: 2 bits per group id indicating the position in the group
6764 *
6765 * Note: This function assumes that the given vif is valid and the position and
6766 * membership data is of the correct size and are in the same byte order as the
6767 * matching GroupId management frame.
6768 * Calls to this function need to be serialized with RX path.
6769 */
6770 void ieee80211_update_mu_groups(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, unsigned int link_id,
6771 const u8 *membership, const u8 *position);
6772
6773 void ieee80211_enable_rssi_reports(struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
6774 int rssi_min_thold,
6775 int rssi_max_thold);
6776
6777 void ieee80211_disable_rssi_reports(struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
6778
6779 /**
6780 * ieee80211_ave_rssi - report the average RSSI for the specified interface
6781 *
6782 * @vif: the specified virtual interface
6783 *
6784 * Note: This function assumes that the given vif is valid.
6785 *
6786 * Return: The average RSSI value for the requested interface, or 0 if not
6787 * applicable.
6788 */
6789 int ieee80211_ave_rssi(struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
6790
6791 /**
6792 * ieee80211_report_wowlan_wakeup - report WoWLAN wakeup
6793 * @vif: virtual interface
6794 * @wakeup: wakeup reason(s)
6795 * @gfp: allocation flags
6796 *
6797 * See cfg80211_report_wowlan_wakeup().
6798 */
6799 void ieee80211_report_wowlan_wakeup(struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
6800 struct cfg80211_wowlan_wakeup *wakeup,
6801 gfp_t gfp);
6802
6803 /**
6804 * ieee80211_tx_prepare_skb - prepare an 802.11 skb for transmission
6805 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw()
6806 * @vif: virtual interface
6807 * @skb: frame to be sent from within the driver
6808 * @band: the band to transmit on
6809 * @sta: optional pointer to get the station to send the frame to
6810 *
6811 * Note: must be called under RCU lock
6812 */
6813 bool ieee80211_tx_prepare_skb(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
6814 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, struct sk_buff *skb,
6815 int band, struct ieee80211_sta **sta);
6816
6817 /**
6818 * ieee80211_parse_tx_radiotap - Sanity-check and parse the radiotap header
6819 * of injected frames.
6820 *
6821 * To accurately parse and take into account rate and retransmission fields,
6822 * you must initialize the chandef field in the ieee80211_tx_info structure
6823 * of the skb before calling this function.
6824 *
6825 * @skb: packet injected by userspace
6826 * @dev: the &struct device of this 802.11 device
6827 */
6828 bool ieee80211_parse_tx_radiotap(struct sk_buff *skb,
6829 struct net_device *dev);
6830
6831 /**
6832 * struct ieee80211_noa_data - holds temporary data for tracking P2P NoA state
6833 *
6834 * @next_tsf: TSF timestamp of the next absent state change
6835 * @has_next_tsf: next absent state change event pending
6836 *
6837 * @absent: descriptor bitmask, set if GO is currently absent
6838 *
6839 * private:
6840 *
6841 * @count: count fields from the NoA descriptors
6842 * @desc: adjusted data from the NoA
6843 */
6844 struct ieee80211_noa_data {
6845 u32 next_tsf;
6846 bool has_next_tsf;
6847
6848 u8 absent;
6849
6850 u8 count[IEEE80211_P2P_NOA_DESC_MAX];
6851 struct {
6852 u32 start;
6853 u32 duration;
6854 u32 interval;
6855 } desc[IEEE80211_P2P_NOA_DESC_MAX];
6856 };
6857
6858 /**
6859 * ieee80211_parse_p2p_noa - initialize NoA tracking data from P2P IE
6860 *
6861 * @attr: P2P NoA IE
6862 * @data: NoA tracking data
6863 * @tsf: current TSF timestamp
6864 *
6865 * Return: number of successfully parsed descriptors
6866 */
6867 int ieee80211_parse_p2p_noa(const struct ieee80211_p2p_noa_attr *attr,
6868 struct ieee80211_noa_data *data, u32 tsf);
6869
6870 /**
6871 * ieee80211_update_p2p_noa - get next pending P2P GO absent state change
6872 *
6873 * @data: NoA tracking data
6874 * @tsf: current TSF timestamp
6875 */
6876 void ieee80211_update_p2p_noa(struct ieee80211_noa_data *data, u32 tsf);
6877
6878 /**
6879 * ieee80211_tdls_oper_request - request userspace to perform a TDLS operation
6880 * @vif: virtual interface
6881 * @peer: the peer's destination address
6882 * @oper: the requested TDLS operation
6883 * @reason_code: reason code for the operation, valid for TDLS teardown
6884 * @gfp: allocation flags
6885 *
6886 * See cfg80211_tdls_oper_request().
6887 */
6888 void ieee80211_tdls_oper_request(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, const u8 *peer,
6889 enum nl80211_tdls_operation oper,
6890 u16 reason_code, gfp_t gfp);
6891
6892 /**
6893 * ieee80211_reserve_tid - request to reserve a specific TID
6894 *
6895 * There is sometimes a need (such as in TDLS) for blocking the driver from
6896 * using a specific TID so that the FW can use it for certain operations such
6897 * as sending PTI requests. To make sure that the driver doesn't use that TID,
6898 * this function must be called as it flushes out packets on this TID and marks
6899 * it as blocked, so that any transmit for the station on this TID will be
6900 * redirected to the alternative TID in the same AC.
6901 *
6902 * Note that this function blocks and may call back into the driver, so it
6903 * should be called without driver locks held. Also note this function should
6904 * only be called from the driver's @sta_state callback.
6905 *
6906 * @sta: the station to reserve the TID for
6907 * @tid: the TID to reserve
6908 *
6909 * Returns: 0 on success, else on failure
6910 */
6911 int ieee80211_reserve_tid(struct ieee80211_sta *sta, u8 tid);
6912
6913 /**
6914 * ieee80211_unreserve_tid - request to unreserve a specific TID
6915 *
6916 * Once there is no longer any need for reserving a certain TID, this function
6917 * should be called, and no longer will packets have their TID modified for
6918 * preventing use of this TID in the driver.
6919 *
6920 * Note that this function blocks and acquires a lock, so it should be called
6921 * without driver locks held. Also note this function should only be called
6922 * from the driver's @sta_state callback.
6923 *
6924 * @sta: the station
6925 * @tid: the TID to unreserve
6926 */
6927 void ieee80211_unreserve_tid(struct ieee80211_sta *sta, u8 tid);
6928
6929 /**
6930 * ieee80211_tx_dequeue - dequeue a packet from a software tx queue
6931 *
6932 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw()
6933 * @txq: pointer obtained from station or virtual interface, or from
6934 * ieee80211_next_txq()
6935 *
6936 * Returns the skb if successful, %NULL if no frame was available.
6937 *
6938 * Note that this must be called in an rcu_read_lock() critical section,
6939 * which can only be released after the SKB was handled. Some pointers in
6940 * skb->cb, e.g. the key pointer, are protected by RCU and thus the
6941 * critical section must persist not just for the duration of this call
6942 * but for the duration of the frame handling.
6943 * However, also note that while in the wake_tx_queue() method,
6944 * rcu_read_lock() is already held.
6945 *
6946 * softirqs must also be disabled when this function is called.
6947 * In process context, use ieee80211_tx_dequeue_ni() instead.
6948 */
6949 struct sk_buff *ieee80211_tx_dequeue(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
6950 struct ieee80211_txq *txq);
6951
6952 /**
6953 * ieee80211_tx_dequeue_ni - dequeue a packet from a software tx queue
6954 * (in process context)
6955 *
6956 * Like ieee80211_tx_dequeue() but can be called in process context
6957 * (internally disables bottom halves).
6958 *
6959 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw()
6960 * @txq: pointer obtained from station or virtual interface, or from
6961 * ieee80211_next_txq()
6962 */
ieee80211_tx_dequeue_ni(struct ieee80211_hw * hw,struct ieee80211_txq * txq)6963 static inline struct sk_buff *ieee80211_tx_dequeue_ni(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
6964 struct ieee80211_txq *txq)
6965 {
6966 struct sk_buff *skb;
6967
6968 local_bh_disable();
6969 skb = ieee80211_tx_dequeue(hw, txq);
6970 local_bh_enable();
6971
6972 return skb;
6973 }
6974
6975 /**
6976 * ieee80211_next_txq - get next tx queue to pull packets from
6977 *
6978 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw()
6979 * @ac: AC number to return packets from.
6980 *
6981 * Returns the next txq if successful, %NULL if no queue is eligible. If a txq
6982 * is returned, it should be returned with ieee80211_return_txq() after the
6983 * driver has finished scheduling it.
6984 */
6985 struct ieee80211_txq *ieee80211_next_txq(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, u8 ac);
6986
6987 /**
6988 * ieee80211_txq_schedule_start - start new scheduling round for TXQs
6989 *
6990 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw()
6991 * @ac: AC number to acquire locks for
6992 *
6993 * Should be called before ieee80211_next_txq() or ieee80211_return_txq().
6994 * The driver must not call multiple TXQ scheduling rounds concurrently.
6995 */
6996 void ieee80211_txq_schedule_start(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, u8 ac);
6997
6998 /* (deprecated) */
ieee80211_txq_schedule_end(struct ieee80211_hw * hw,u8 ac)6999 static inline void ieee80211_txq_schedule_end(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, u8 ac)
7000 {
7001 }
7002
7003 void __ieee80211_schedule_txq(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
7004 struct ieee80211_txq *txq, bool force);
7005
7006 /**
7007 * ieee80211_schedule_txq - schedule a TXQ for transmission
7008 *
7009 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw()
7010 * @txq: pointer obtained from station or virtual interface
7011 *
7012 * Schedules a TXQ for transmission if it is not already scheduled,
7013 * even if mac80211 does not have any packets buffered.
7014 *
7015 * The driver may call this function if it has buffered packets for
7016 * this TXQ internally.
7017 */
7018 static inline void
ieee80211_schedule_txq(struct ieee80211_hw * hw,struct ieee80211_txq * txq)7019 ieee80211_schedule_txq(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_txq *txq)
7020 {
7021 __ieee80211_schedule_txq(hw, txq, true);
7022 }
7023
7024 /**
7025 * ieee80211_return_txq - return a TXQ previously acquired by ieee80211_next_txq()
7026 *
7027 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw()
7028 * @txq: pointer obtained from station or virtual interface
7029 * @force: schedule txq even if mac80211 does not have any buffered packets.
7030 *
7031 * The driver may set force=true if it has buffered packets for this TXQ
7032 * internally.
7033 */
7034 static inline void
ieee80211_return_txq(struct ieee80211_hw * hw,struct ieee80211_txq * txq,bool force)7035 ieee80211_return_txq(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_txq *txq,
7036 bool force)
7037 {
7038 __ieee80211_schedule_txq(hw, txq, force);
7039 }
7040
7041 /**
7042 * ieee80211_txq_may_transmit - check whether TXQ is allowed to transmit
7043 *
7044 * This function is used to check whether given txq is allowed to transmit by
7045 * the airtime scheduler, and can be used by drivers to access the airtime
7046 * fairness accounting without going using the scheduling order enfored by
7047 * next_txq().
7048 *
7049 * Returns %true if the airtime scheduler thinks the TXQ should be allowed to
7050 * transmit, and %false if it should be throttled. This function can also have
7051 * the side effect of rotating the TXQ in the scheduler rotation, which will
7052 * eventually bring the deficit to positive and allow the station to transmit
7053 * again.
7054 *
7055 * The API ieee80211_txq_may_transmit() also ensures that TXQ list will be
7056 * aligned against driver's own round-robin scheduler list. i.e it rotates
7057 * the TXQ list till it makes the requested node becomes the first entry
7058 * in TXQ list. Thus both the TXQ list and driver's list are in sync. If this
7059 * function returns %true, the driver is expected to schedule packets
7060 * for transmission, and then return the TXQ through ieee80211_return_txq().
7061 *
7062 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw()
7063 * @txq: pointer obtained from station or virtual interface
7064 */
7065 bool ieee80211_txq_may_transmit(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
7066 struct ieee80211_txq *txq);
7067
7068 /**
7069 * ieee80211_txq_get_depth - get pending frame/byte count of given txq
7070 *
7071 * The values are not guaranteed to be coherent with regard to each other, i.e.
7072 * txq state can change half-way of this function and the caller may end up
7073 * with "new" frame_cnt and "old" byte_cnt or vice-versa.
7074 *
7075 * @txq: pointer obtained from station or virtual interface
7076 * @frame_cnt: pointer to store frame count
7077 * @byte_cnt: pointer to store byte count
7078 */
7079 void ieee80211_txq_get_depth(struct ieee80211_txq *txq,
7080 unsigned long *frame_cnt,
7081 unsigned long *byte_cnt);
7082
7083 /**
7084 * ieee80211_nan_func_terminated - notify about NAN function termination.
7085 *
7086 * This function is used to notify mac80211 about NAN function termination.
7087 * Note that this function can't be called from hard irq.
7088 *
7089 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
7090 * @inst_id: the local instance id
7091 * @reason: termination reason (one of the NL80211_NAN_FUNC_TERM_REASON_*)
7092 * @gfp: allocation flags
7093 */
7094 void ieee80211_nan_func_terminated(struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
7095 u8 inst_id,
7096 enum nl80211_nan_func_term_reason reason,
7097 gfp_t gfp);
7098
7099 /**
7100 * ieee80211_nan_func_match - notify about NAN function match event.
7101 *
7102 * This function is used to notify mac80211 about NAN function match. The
7103 * cookie inside the match struct will be assigned by mac80211.
7104 * Note that this function can't be called from hard irq.
7105 *
7106 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
7107 * @match: match event information
7108 * @gfp: allocation flags
7109 */
7110 void ieee80211_nan_func_match(struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
7111 struct cfg80211_nan_match_params *match,
7112 gfp_t gfp);
7113
7114 /**
7115 * ieee80211_calc_rx_airtime - calculate estimated transmission airtime for RX.
7116 *
7117 * This function calculates the estimated airtime usage of a frame based on the
7118 * rate information in the RX status struct and the frame length.
7119 *
7120 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw()
7121 * @status: &struct ieee80211_rx_status containing the transmission rate
7122 * information.
7123 * @len: frame length in bytes
7124 */
7125 u32 ieee80211_calc_rx_airtime(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
7126 struct ieee80211_rx_status *status,
7127 int len);
7128
7129 /**
7130 * ieee80211_calc_tx_airtime - calculate estimated transmission airtime for TX.
7131 *
7132 * This function calculates the estimated airtime usage of a frame based on the
7133 * rate information in the TX info struct and the frame length.
7134 *
7135 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw()
7136 * @info: &struct ieee80211_tx_info of the frame.
7137 * @len: frame length in bytes
7138 */
7139 u32 ieee80211_calc_tx_airtime(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
7140 struct ieee80211_tx_info *info,
7141 int len);
7142 /**
7143 * ieee80211_set_hw_80211_encap - enable hardware encapsulation offloading.
7144 *
7145 * This function is used to notify mac80211 that a vif can be passed raw 802.3
7146 * frames. The driver needs to then handle the 802.11 encapsulation inside the
7147 * hardware or firmware.
7148 *
7149 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
7150 * @enable: indicate if the feature should be turned on or off
7151 */
7152 bool ieee80211_set_hw_80211_encap(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, bool enable);
7153
7154 /**
7155 * ieee80211_get_fils_discovery_tmpl - Get FILS discovery template.
7156 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
7157 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
7158 *
7159 * The driver is responsible for freeing the returned skb.
7160 *
7161 * Return: FILS discovery template. %NULL on error.
7162 */
7163 struct sk_buff *ieee80211_get_fils_discovery_tmpl(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
7164 struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
7165
7166 /**
7167 * ieee80211_get_unsol_bcast_probe_resp_tmpl - Get unsolicited broadcast
7168 * probe response template.
7169 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
7170 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
7171 *
7172 * The driver is responsible for freeing the returned skb.
7173 *
7174 * Return: Unsolicited broadcast probe response template. %NULL on error.
7175 */
7176 struct sk_buff *
7177 ieee80211_get_unsol_bcast_probe_resp_tmpl(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
7178 struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
7179
7180 /**
7181 * ieeee80211_obss_color_collision_notify - notify userland about a BSS color
7182 * collision.
7183 *
7184 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
7185 * @color_bitmap: a 64 bit bitmap representing the colors that the local BSS is
7186 * aware of.
7187 * @gfp: allocation flags
7188 */
7189 void
7190 ieeee80211_obss_color_collision_notify(struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
7191 u64 color_bitmap, gfp_t gfp);
7192
7193 /**
7194 * ieee80211_is_tx_data - check if frame is a data frame
7195 *
7196 * The function is used to check if a frame is a data frame. Frames with
7197 * hardware encapsulation enabled are data frames.
7198 *
7199 * @skb: the frame to be transmitted.
7200 */
ieee80211_is_tx_data(struct sk_buff * skb)7201 static inline bool ieee80211_is_tx_data(struct sk_buff *skb)
7202 {
7203 struct ieee80211_tx_info *info = IEEE80211_SKB_CB(skb);
7204 struct ieee80211_hdr *hdr = (void *) skb->data;
7205
7206 return info->flags & IEEE80211_TX_CTL_HW_80211_ENCAP ||
7207 ieee80211_is_data(hdr->frame_control);
7208 }
7209
7210 /**
7211 * ieee80211_set_active_links - set active links in client mode
7212 * @vif: interface to set active links on
7213 * @active_links: the new active links bitmap
7214 *
7215 * This changes the active links on an interface. The interface
7216 * must be in client mode (in AP mode, all links are always active),
7217 * and @active_links must be a subset of the vif's valid_links.
7218 *
7219 * If a link is switched off and another is switched on at the same
7220 * time (e.g. active_links going from 0x1 to 0x10) then you will get
7221 * a sequence of calls like
7222 * - change_vif_links(0x11)
7223 * - unassign_vif_chanctx(link_id=0)
7224 * - change_sta_links(0x11) for each affected STA (the AP)
7225 * (TDLS connections on now inactive links should be torn down)
7226 * - remove group keys on the old link (link_id 0)
7227 * - add new group keys (GTK/IGTK/BIGTK) on the new link (link_id 4)
7228 * - change_sta_links(0x10) for each affected STA (the AP)
7229 * - assign_vif_chanctx(link_id=4)
7230 * - change_vif_links(0x10)
7231 *
7232 * Note: This function acquires some mac80211 locks and must not
7233 * be called with any driver locks held that could cause a
7234 * lock dependency inversion. Best call it without locks.
7235 */
7236 int ieee80211_set_active_links(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, u16 active_links);
7237
7238 /**
7239 * ieee80211_set_active_links_async - asynchronously set active links
7240 * @vif: interface to set active links on
7241 * @active_links: the new active links bitmap
7242 *
7243 * See ieee80211_set_active_links() for more information, the only
7244 * difference here is that the link change is triggered async and
7245 * can be called in any context, but the link switch will only be
7246 * completed after it returns.
7247 */
7248 void ieee80211_set_active_links_async(struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
7249 u16 active_links);
7250
7251 #endif /* MAC80211_H */
7252